JP7206477B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine that uses game balls as game media.

In general, pachinko gaming machines are provided with a main control board that controls games and a sub-control board that performs control processing based on commands (performance control commands) from the main control board. And among these, as a sub-control board, a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an illumination control board, a sound control board, etc. can be exemplified. Further, some pachinko game machines have a function of increasing the number of balls obtained by the player even in a game state other than a big win. As such a function, a so-called electric chew support (hereinafter referred to as "electric support") is known.
JP 2017-113046 A

By the way, gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines require moderate gambling and high entertainment. However, the execution period of the electric support is generally determined, for example, 100 times, 50 times, or until the next big hit. Then, if no big win or small win occurs, the continuation of the electric support period over a predetermined number of times such as 100 times or 50 times is guaranteed. For this reason, the number of balls obtained by the player during the electric support period may be excessive for the number of game balls that have been shot. In addition, in order to make the gambling nature of the gaming machine appropriate and to improve the taste, it is desirable to be able to select a function other than the electric sapo as a function that gradually increases the number of balls to be paid out.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and its object is to provide a pachinko game machine that is highly entertaining and has appropriate game characteristics.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of a game,
Production control means (sub-main board, etc.) that receives production control information (main command, etc.) from the main control means and performs control processing according to the production control information,
An image display means (such as an effect display device) that displays an image related to the effect determined by the effect control means,
The main control means is
Acquiring a predetermined random number based on the fact that the game medium launched into the game area flows down the game area and passes through a predetermined start area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.),
The random numbers include at least a winning random number for determining a winning lottery, a special symbol random number (such as a random number per special symbol) for determining a special symbol indicating the result of the winning lottery determination, and a special symbol related to the special symbol. and a variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern,
A winning lottery determination is performed to determine whether or not the winning is based on the winning random number,
Perform a special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol based on the special symbol random number,
Perform a variation pattern lottery determination for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number,
The hit includes a big win and a small win that is different from the big win,
Based on the results of the winning lottery determination, the special symbol lottery determination, and the variation pattern lottery determination, the special symbol is variably displayed by the main control display means and then stopped and displayed,
When the result of the winning lottery determination is a big win, after the stop display of the special symbol, a predetermined open/close area based on establishment of a predetermined big win game start condition (detection of a game ball at an operation opening, etc.) Execute a jackpot game in which a jackpot (such as a jackpot) is opened in a predetermined manner for a jackpot,
When the result of the winning lottery determination is a small winning, a small winning game is executed in which the predetermined opening/closing area is opened in a predetermined manner for the small winning after the stop display of the special symbol,
When the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbols is not satisfied even if the game medium passes through the starting area, the special symbol reserved storage information related to the random number can be stored within a predetermined number,
It is possible to set a period of a small winning expectation game (second RUSH etc.) which is a game for encouraging expectation of the small winning, following the big winning game,
The starting area includes a first starting area (such as the first starting winning opening), a second starting area ( such as the 2-1 starting winning opening ) that is the target of the small hit, and the second starting area. There is also a third start area (2-2 start winning opening, etc.) that is arranged on the downstream side of the flow of the game medium and is the target of the small hit ,
The second starting region is provided with a variable member that can change the ease of entering the ball into the second starting region,
When the game medium is shot in a first shooting mode (such as left-handed hitting) for passing the game medium through the first start area, and when the game medium is made to pass through the second start area or the third start area . There is a case where the game medium is fired in the second firing mode (right hitting, etc.),
The variable member has an easy ball entry state (electric sapo, time saving, etc.) that facilitates displacement to a mode that facilitates ball entry into the second start region, and facilitates entry of the ball into the second start region;
In the game state (small hit, etc.) when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, the third start area is displayed for a predetermined period (such as a period of 0.4 seconds in the short-time monitoring period ). ), the first error notification ( flickering of the game effect lamp in a predetermined manner and output of a predetermined warning sound, etc.) is performed, and during a specific period ( long-term monitoring If a specific number of balls (such as 20 balls ) are entered during a period of 7 seconds or 45 seconds, etc.), a second error notification different from the first error notification is performed,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific period or the specific number differs depending on whether or not the easy-to-enter state exists.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that is excellent in taste and has appropriate game properties.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the functions of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the main board configuration of the pachinko game machine. (a) is a front view showing a substrate case in which a main substrate is accommodated, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view schematically showing a portion along line AA in (a). 3 is a block diagram showing basic functional means of a main board, a sub-main board, and a sub-sub-board; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a main pattern display substrate of the main control display device. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device while the effect symbols are changing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a display example of the effect symbols being stopped. (a) is a chart showing a success/failure determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table for losing. (a) is a diagram showing a big-hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, and (b) is a diagram showing a big-hit symbol determination table for the second lottery. (a) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used when losing, (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used when a 16R big hit, and (c) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used when a 6R big win. 4 is a flowchart showing power-on processing in the main board. 4 is a flowchart showing initialization processing; 7 is a flowchart showing setting value change processing; It is a flow chart showing a game progress interrupt process in the main board. 10 is a flow chart showing lottery determination processing in the main board. 4 is a flowchart showing power-off processing in the main substrate; (a) is a perspective view showing the operation buttons, the cross key, and their surroundings as seen from the front and above, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the flow-down path of game balls related to the start winning opening and the big winning opening according to special figure 2. It is an explanatory diagram schematically shown. It is an explanatory diagram showing a basic state transition of the game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the special state transition of a game. (a) is a chart showing the ratio of various jackpots in a situation without an electric sapo, (b) is a chart showing the ratio of various jackpots in a situation with an electric sapo, (c) a limited frequency pattern table used during time saving It is a chart showing. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of the flow of effects from the occurrence of the first bonus to the second RUSH effect, (b) is an explanatory view showing the state before the payout number reaches the standard number in the standard exceeding effect, (c) ) is an explanatory diagram showing the state when the number of payouts reaches the reference number in the over-reference effect. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of effects from the generation of the third bonus to the second RUSH effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a big hit occurs during the second RUSH. . (a1) and (a2) are explanatory diagrams sequentially showing examples of effects when the number of stocks is 1, (b1) and (b2) are explanatory diagrams sequentially showing examples of effects when the number of stocks is 2, (c1) ) and (c2) are explanatory diagrams sequentially showing examples of effects when the number of stocks is three. 4 is a chart schematically showing a list of main fluctuation patterns; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state transition from before the occurrence of the big hit to immediately after the big hit game, (b1) is an explanatory diagram showing the right-hand navigation display 0 for production, and (b2) is an explanation showing the right-hand navigation display 1 for production. Fig. (b3) is an explanatory diagram showing a right-handed navigation display 2 for production, and (b4) is an explanatory diagram showing a right-handed navigation display 3 for production. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a right-handed navigation display 4 for production, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a left-handed navigation display 1 for production, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a left-handed navigation display 2 for production, (d) ) is an explanatory diagram showing the left-hand navigation display 3 for effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing state transitions when a stock effect develops into a subsequent effect; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a recovery screen in the case of recovery from power failure in a game state in which the game should be played to the right; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the mini-symbol related to the special figure 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area, omitting other images, and (b) is the reduced effect symbol display for the special figure 2 An explanatory diagram showing the state in which the mini-design related to the special figure 2 is displayed in the area, omitting other images, (c) shows both the mini-design related to the special figure 1 and the mini-design related to the special figure 2 FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which other images are omitted; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first case (last fluctuation in special figure 2), (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the second case (special figure 1 fluctuation during last fluctuation in special figure 2), (c ) is an explanatory diagram showing the third case (last variation in special figure 1 during special figure 2 variation). (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the fourth case (last fluctuation in special figure 1 during special figure 2 fluctuation long), (b) shows the fifth case (special figure 1 SP reach in special figure 2 fluctuation long) Explanatory diagram, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the sixth case (last variation in special figure 1 during variation per special figure 2). (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the seventh case (last fluctuation in special figure 1), (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the eighth case (special figure 2 fluctuation during last fluctuation in special figure 1), (c ) is an explanatory diagram showing the sixth case (special figure 2 last fluctuation during last fluctuation in special figure 1).

An embodiment of a pachinko game machine according to the present invention will be described below. First, in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game feature is adopted in which small hits can be generated intensively in a short period of time. This game property that allows concentration of small wins can be called "small win rush" (or "small win RUSH" or the like).

In addition, in this embodiment, while making it possible to generate a "small winning rush", in order to effectively utilize this "small winning rush", the configuration of the game board surface, the operation control of the big winning opening, and the effect Various points such as control have been devised. Below, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment will be described, and then the game procedure, effects, control modes, etc. in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment will be described.
<Basic Configuration of Pachinko Machines>

FIG. 1 shows the front configuration of a pachinko game machine 10 according to this embodiment. In the pachinko game machine 10, a game board 50 is attached to a game machine frame 11, which will be described later. Of these, the game board 50 has different structural elements such as accessory devices and designs depending on the model of the pachinko game machine 10 . Further, the game board 50 can be separated from the game machine frame 11 by canceling the electrical connection and structural connection with the game machine frame 11 .

In addition, by standardizing the structural and electrical connections with the game machine frame 11 for the game board 50 of a plurality of models, so-called model change in which the game machine frame 11 is shared between different models becomes possible. there is In the following description, the game machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board configuration of the game board 50 will be described.

The gaming machine frame 11 described above has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also called “inner frame” or “main body frame”) 13, and a lower front plate (also called “curtain plate”) 14. . Furthermore, a glass door 15 and a plate unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 . Of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame body used to fix the pachinko game machine 10 to a predetermined position in an island facility in a game hall (game parlor), and as shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the plate unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 have an opening that is closed on the front side.

Further, as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility, nailing is generally performed. At least the portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island facility is made of wood. Instead of wood, for example, a plastic material that can be nailed can be used. Moreover, as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility, it is possible to employ a construction method other than nailing.

The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 swings forward from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 with the left edge in FIG. Further, the front frame 13 swings rearward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and locks, and then becomes the closed state again. When the front frame 13 is closed, the front frame 13 closes the portion between the upper short portion of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14 described above.

Locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder portion 17 of the lock device is disposed below the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. The keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko game machine 10 through the aforementioned plate unit 16. - 特許庁When the game parlor clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key, for example, counterclockwise, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the locking device, and the front frame 13 is placed in the open state. Become.

Unlike the front frame 13, the aforementioned lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12 .

The glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 arranged in front of the front frame 13 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the tray unit 16 can swing independently with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. The glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are, for example, horizontally swung forward by a game parlor clerk to be in an open state, and then horizontally swung backward from the open state to be locked to the front frame 13.例文帳に追加This results in a closed state.

Locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and release from the front frame 13 are performed via the aforementioned lock device (not shown). That is, when the game parlor clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key, for example, in the clockwise direction opposite to when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. , and the glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13 and pushed in so that the glass door 15 is parallel to the front frame 13, whereby the locking device is operated and the glass door 15 is moved forward again. It locks onto the frame 13 .

Also, by opening the glass door 15, the locking mechanism (not shown) of the plate unit 16 appears and becomes operable. By performing the pushing operation, the plate unit 16 is brought into an open state. Further, the plate unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13 and pushed in so that the plate unit 16 is parallel to the front frame 13, whereby the locking mechanism is activated and the plate unit 16 is released again. It locks onto the front frame 13 .

Further, the glass door 15 detachably holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates, and the game board 50 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine 10 through these transparent plates when in the closed state. I'm trying As the transparent plate, in addition to a glass plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held by the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage or the like for guiding and collecting game balls, which are game media.

The plate unit 16 has an upper ball plate 18, a lower ball plate 19, a shooting handle 20 and the like on its front surface. Of these, the upper ball tray 18 stores game balls, supplies game balls to a shooting device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via a shooting handle 20, and supplies game balls to the lower ball tray 19. Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ball ejection. In addition, the lower ball tray 19 stores game balls, receives game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and transfers game balls to a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko machine 10. Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ejection. In some cases, the ball box is provided integrally with the island facility.

In addition, in this embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided at the upper corner of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14, and other parts. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Further, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on the portion of the upper ball tray 18 facing the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper portion of the upper spherical plate 18 and positioned near the center of the upper spherical plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is internally provided with an operation button light emitter (not shown), and performs light output according to the effect pattern to be executed.

In addition, the operation button 22 may be projected upward in a predetermined case by using a driving source such as a motor. Although not shown in detail, the operation button 22 in this embodiment is displaced in such a manner that the tip of the operation button 22 protrudes upward when driven by an elevating motor, thereby forming an operation lever input portion capable of performing input by tilting. It has a crescent-shaped eccentric cam for generating vibrations in the drive train of the operating lever.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), a cross key 96 is provided in addition to the operation buttons 22, and the player can use the cross key 96 to set various environments. Examples of the contents of the environment setting include adjustment of the volume of the speaker 21, adjustment of the brightness and light amount of the effect display described later, and change of the effect mode. Further, it is possible to provide, for example, the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11, with a display device capable of displaying effects related to the game and the above-described environment settings.

Furthermore, other than the cross key, it is possible to use, for example, a lever-shaped operation means, various types of touch panels, and the like. In addition, the code 97 in FIG. 18(a) is a ball lending button, and the code 98 is a return button. Further, reference numeral 98 in FIG. 18(a) denotes a ball ejection button for the upper ball tray 18. As shown in FIG.
<Back structure of pachinko machine>

Next, the basic configuration of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the front frame 13 is provided with a game ball passage or the like for guiding or collecting game balls, and a set base (also referred to as a "back set board") 31 serving as a winning ball path forming mechanism. is attached, and below this set board 31, there are a power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire game machine, and a payout control (also called "prize ball control") board for controlling the game machine frame side. 103 are attached in a state in which they are each housed in a dedicated transparent case. In addition, on the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 that controls the entire game and a sub-board 104 that executes effect control based on control commands from the main board 102 are respectively dedicated. It is housed in a transparent case and provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set board 31 . Furthermore, the set board 31 also includes a launcher 43 and a launch control board 105 that controls the launcher 43 .

In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the above opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island facility to become prize balls. Furthermore, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from above the game board 50 when the pachinko game machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. It is

The prize ball passage 34 described above rectifies and guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. In addition, the aforementioned payout unit 35 can discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 in communication with the prize ball passage 34 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flowed down from the payout unit 35 to the ball tray (upper ball tray 18 or lower ball tray 19) as prize balls.

The aforementioned power supply unit 32 is provided at the lower left portion of the set board 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. The power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from outside the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the voltages to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub-board 104, and the like. A power switch 40 for activating the power supply unit 32 is arranged behind other devices as indicated by a hidden line (broken line) in the lower right portion of the figure. The power switch 40 is installed so that it is turned on when the lower part of the power switch 40 is pressed and tilted downward so that it will not be turned off even if a dropped game ball hits it directly.

The aforementioned payout control board 103 is arranged at the lower right portion of the set board 31 when the pachinko game machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function of controlling the payout unit 35 according to a payout instruction from the main board 102 or a lending request from the outside. Further, the above-described shooting control board 105 has a shooting control function of controlling the shooting device 43 so as to shoot a game ball (hit ball) into the game area with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the shooting handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing. Furthermore, about 100 game balls can be continuously shot per minute.

The main board 102 described above is arranged at the lower center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly functions such as various lottery functions, setting change functions, payout control board 103 and sub-board 104 control functions, etc. It has a central processing function in the pachinko game machine 10 . The sub-board 104 described above is arranged in the upper central part on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

The sub-board 104 includes a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) responsible for the main function of effect control, and a sub-sub-board specializing in a specific effect function such as image creation (in this embodiment sub-sub-board 302), but the term "sub-board" encompasses these. In addition, on the lower right part on the back side of the set board 31, there is an external relay terminal board (such as a "frame relay terminal board") that relays signals from the main board 102, payout control board 103, etc. to devices outside the pachinko game machine 10. ) 46 is provided.

The setting change function of the main board 102 described above is a function that can change the setting value that defines the theoretical probability of winning (the degree of advantage for the player). In this embodiment, six types of integer values "1" to "6" are provided as set values. The ball output rate is different. Such change of setting values and the like will be described later.
<Board configuration of the game board>

Next, the aforementioned game board 50 and the parts (board parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (eg, transparent acrylic resin) or wood (plywood). Also, the game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding game balls to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The game board 50 is attached to the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board surface components are attached facing forward, and is closed by the closed glass door 15 and the like. The front is covered. Furthermore, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is formed by combining inner rails and outer rails formed in a curved band shape.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 52 includes a first starter unit 61 located in the lower center row when viewed from the front, a second starter unit 63 located in the middle right corner, and a large player located in the lower right corner. A prize winning device (attacker unit) 90 and the like are provided. In addition, at the bottom of the game area 52, an out port (58) hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. 1 is provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of performing display for effect, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

Here, in the present embodiment, the second starting unit 63 and the big winning opening device 90 are denoted by different symbols, but the second starting opening unit 63 and the big winning opening device 90 are separated from each other. can be a unit. In addition, the second starting opening unit 63 and the big winning opening device 90 can be made into an integrated unit and called, for example, a "right side unit".

In addition, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown) and mechanisms such as windmills. In addition, it is also possible not to provide a windmill. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the game board 50 at the bottom left of the game area 52 . The specific configuration and functions of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the above-described board structure of the game board 50 can be varied in various ways according to the game characteristics employed in the pachinko game machine 10, for example.
<Functions of board parts>

Next, specific functions and configurations of the individual board components described above will be described. First, the first starting winning opening 62 is provided in the first starting opening unit 61 described above. The first starting prize winning port 62 is a starting prize winning port related to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance for game balls and does not change the size of the entrance for game balls. Furthermore, the first start winning opening 62 has a first starting winning detection device 74 (sensor) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 62 (FIG. 3), and the output of this sensor Signals are input to the main substrate 102 described above.

The above-mentioned second starting opening unit 63 is provided with a 2-1 starting winning opening 63A, a 2-2 starting winning opening 63B, an operating opening 68, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and the like. Both the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A and the 2-2 starting winning opening 63B are starting winning openings related to the second game.

Of these, the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A is arranged above the middle stage of the second starting opening unit 63. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is a start opening for a normal electric accessory (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and is a second opening that can be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction of the game board 50. It has a starting shutter 67 . In the 2-1 start winning opening 63A, when a normal symbol (to be described later) is stopped and displayed in a win mode, the second start opening shutter 67 slides backward in the game board 50, and an opening operation is performed. Then, the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A is opened for a predetermined time based on the operation of the normal electric accessory, so that the game ball can enter the 2-2 starting winning opening 63B.

Furthermore, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A, as shown in FIG. and an object solenoid 76 . The output signal of the 2-1 start winning detection device 75A is input to the main substrate 102. FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes for opening the 2-1 start winning opening 63A. These open modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) mode (referred to as "short open" or "short open") and a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as “long open”, “long open”, etc.). It is also possible to provide a mode of middle opening set to an opening time between short opening and long opening.

The aforementioned 2-2 starting winning opening 63B is arranged in the vicinity of the middle stage of the second starting opening unit 63. As shown in FIG. The 2-2nd starting winning port 63B is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Further, the 2-2nd start prize winning port 63B is provided with a 2-2nd start prize detection device 75B (sensor), as shown in FIG. The output signal of the 2-2nd start winning detection device 75B is input to the main board 102. FIG.

The operating port 68 described above is arranged above the second starting port unit 63 . Further, the operating port 68 is provided with a passage detection device 69, as shown in FIG. The output signal of the sensor in the passing detection device 69 is input to the main board 102, and the passing detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of the ball entering. And, this actuation port 68 is used as a trigger for starting fluctuation of the normal symbols, which will be described later, and as a trigger for starting a big hit game, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 arranged on the left side of the game area 52 is provided with a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entry of game balls. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102 .

When the general prize winning detection device 73 is shared by a plurality of general prize winning ports 72, the game balls entered into the plurality of general prize winning ports 72 are gathered at the place where the general prize winning detection device 73 is arranged and detected. It is possible to In addition, it is also possible to group a plurality of general winning openings 72 for each positional relationship or for each number of prize balls (common use of the general winning detection device 73).

The above-mentioned big winning slot device 90 arranged on the right side of the game area 52 is formed in a case shape by combining parts made of transparent synthetic resin. It has The big winning opening 92 has a laterally long opening, and is internally equipped with a big winning opening shutter 91 (indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 1) which is an opening/closing door for opening and closing the opening. Then, the big winning opening shutter 91 is opened in a predetermined manner when a big winning or a small winning occurs. Here, in this embodiment, the big winning opening 92 is open to the front, and the big winning opening shutter 91 can slide in the front and rear direction of the game board 50 . Then, when the big winning opening shutter 91 is performing the opening operation, the big winning opening 92 is opened and the ball can enter the big winning opening 92 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the big winning gate device 90 includes a big winning detection device 78 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the big winning gate 92, and the opening and closing drive of the above-mentioned big winning gate shutter 91. It is provided with a large winning opening (opening) solenoid 80. Of these, the big winning detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 92 , and its output signal is input to the main board 102 .

It should be noted that various types of openings can be used as the large winning opening 92 . For example, as the big winning opening 92, it is possible to adopt one that opens upward. In addition, as the big winning opening 92, a plurality of types of operation patterns (opening/closing patterns) related to the big winning opening shutter 91 are provided, and in the big winning game executed when the big winning occurs and the small winning game executed when the small winning occurs, It is possible to adopt such as to operate the big winning opening shutter 91 in a predetermined operation pattern.

In addition, the big winning gate device 90 is provided with a performance attacker 93 as indicated by a dashed line in the figure. The effect attacker 93 has a laterally long opening, and is provided with a falling door 94 for opening and closing the opening. The performance attacker 93 performs an opening operation of the lodging door 94 in a predetermined manner in a predetermined case. When performing the opening action, the performance attacker 93 changes its posture from a substantially vertical upright state to a lying down state toward the front of the game board 50 with the lower edge as the center. Further, although not shown, the performance attacker 93 is provided with a performance attacker solenoid for opening and closing the reclining door 94 .

In the big winning gate device 90, the transparent plate in front of the performance attacker 93 is provided with a decorative portion 90a, which is a means for making visibility difficult, as indicated by a chain double-dashed line, for example. A light guide plate is used for the decorative portion 90a, and when a light source (LED) is turned on in a predetermined case as described later, a predetermined character string is illuminated and emerges, and the effect attacker 93 is displayed to the player. and the state of the lodging door 94 are made difficult to visually recognize. Here, drive control of the effect attacker 93 and the LEDs that illuminate the decorative portion 90a is performed by the sub-board 104 (FIG. 2) for effect purposes, and the details of the drive control will be described later.

The aforementioned out port 58 is provided with an out ball detection device (out port sensor) 82, as shown in FIG. The out-port sensor 82 detects a game ball (out-ball) that has entered the out-port 58 without becoming a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52 . The detection result of the out-port sensor 82 is used for counting out-balls and displaying (base display) on a performance display unit (entering-ball state indicator 808 in FIG. 5A, which will be described later). It has become.

The aforementioned center decoration 64 has a performance function and the like, and an LED board on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided inside the center decoration 64 . By driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED passes through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration (light effect).

In addition, a plurality of movable production members are provided on the back (inner side) of the center decoration 64, and these movable production members constitute a gimmick for production. These movable production members are normally hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60, although illustration is omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, light decoration (light effect) is also performed on the movable effect member.

In addition, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed on the right side of the center decoration 64 as viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 functions as a flow path for game balls in addition to the performance function as described above. have.

Also, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88 . As the light guide plate 88, although illustration is omitted, for example, it is possible to employ a plate provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with their plate surfaces facing forward and backward. Furthermore, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center decoration 64 and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60 . The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64 .

Various light guide plates such as the light guide plate 88 and the light guide plate used in the decorative portion 90a can be configured as follows, for example. That is, inside the center ornament 64 and the big winning slot device 90, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged in a belt shape so as to face one of the right and left end faces of the transparent plate, for example. Normally, the display content of the effect display device 60 and the appearance of the effect attacker 93 are displayed outside the transparent plate so that the player can visually recognize the display contents of the effect display device 60 and the effect attacker 93 without superimposing other images on the screen of the effect display device 60 and the effect attacker 93 . is permeated to

However, inside each transparent plate that constitutes the light guide plate, minute unevenness that cannot be seen under normal circumstances is formed. Then, when a predetermined effect is executed, for example, the above-described light source facing the end surface of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light from the light source is emitted from the end surface of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. be. Further, the light is diffused by the projections and depressions of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and the diffused light causes predetermined illustrations, characters, etc., to appear in colors recognizable by the player.

Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88 provided in the center decoration 64, the other transparent plate is engraved with irregularities for forming an image different from the above-described illustrations. By driving the light source facing the end face during a predetermined effect, an illustration different from the one described above emerges so that the player can recognize it.

Here, not only one of the right and left end faces of the transparent plate but also one of the upper and lower end faces of the transparent plate can be faced with a light source, and the light from this light source can be used to project other illustrations or the like. By doing so, it is possible to display two types of images on one transparent plate. Also, the number of transparent plates in the light guide plate 88 of the center decoration 64 may be one or three or more. As for the center decoration 64, it is also possible to use a transmissive liquid crystal display in place of or in combination with the light guide plate 88. FIG. A light guide plate is also used in the above-described decorative portion 90a provided in the big winning slot device 90, and effects using the decorative portion 90a will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 7, the aforementioned main control display device 53 has a pattern display board (main pattern display board) 256 on which a large number of LED indicator lamps are arranged. The symbol display board 256 has a normal symbol display portion 59 for displaying the above-described normal symbols, a first special symbol display portion 70 for displaying a first special symbol (to be described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game. A second special symbol display portion 71 for displaying a second special symbol (to be described later) and various other display portions are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, the above-described normal symbol display unit 59 constitutes a normal symbol display device. The first special symbol display section 70 constitutes a first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display section 71 constitutes a second special symbol display device.

In the following, the normal design is "General", the special design is "Special", the first special design is "1st Special", "Special 1", "Special 1", and the second special is " It may be referred to as "second special figure", "special figure 2", "special figure 2", etc. Furthermore, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".

Further, the main control display device 53 described above means one provided on the game board 50, but as will be described later, a setting display section (setting in FIG. The display 807) and the performance display section (ball entry state display 808 in FIG. 5A, which will be described later), etc., can also be included in the main control display device. In that case, the setting display section and the performance display section provided on the main board 102 can also be called, for example, a "main board side main control display device".
<Basic game procedure>

Next, a game procedure in the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where game balls are supplied to the upper ball tray 18, when the player operates and rotates the shooting handle 20, the upper ball tray 18 is moved with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in are shot one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the game ball is guided by the inner rail and the outer rail, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is released to the game area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

In a normal game, the player shoots the game ball so that it flows down on the left side of the game area 52 and aims at the first starting winning hole 62 located in the lower central part of the game area 52 . A shooting mode that mainly uses the left side of the game area 52 is called left-handed shooting. Further, while the player is operating the shooting handle 20, the shooting device 43 described above shoots game balls at predetermined time intervals (for example, intervals not exceeding 100 shots per minute). The game balls successively released to the game area 52 fall in a direction according to factors such as speed, incident angle (or reflection angle), etc. while interfering with a plurality of game nails, windmills, and the like.

When a game ball falls into various winning openings such as the above-described general winning opening 72 and the first start winning opening 62, the entry of the ball is detected, and payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball tray 18 as prize balls through the above-described payout unit 35 according to the type of winning hole into which the balls enter. In addition, when the upper ball tray 18 is filled with a large number of game balls and the following game balls that are put out cannot enter the upper ball tray 18, these game balls are led to the lower ball tray 19 as overflow balls. .

Also, game balls falling into various winning holes become safe balls and are guided from the surface side of the game board 50 to the back side. In addition, the game ball that does not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52 and falls into an out port (58), and is guided to the back side of the game board 50.例文帳に追加Then, the game ball that has reached the back side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter or a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 to the above-mentioned island facility side. is discharged.

The operation port 68 described above is a gate through which game balls pass, unlike the above-described winning port for generating the safe balls. It should be noted that hereinafter, the operation port 68 is referred to as a “winning hole”, and the terms “falling in”, “entering a ball”, and “winning a prize” in the present embodiment will not be used unless otherwise specified. ” shall be included.

In a game situation that is not a situation of hitting a big hit, if the game ball is detected by entering the operation hole 68, if a predetermined fluctuation start condition (normal pattern fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied , the main control display device 53, normal symbols (described later) are variably displayed. The normal pattern displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed based on the ball entering the operation port 68, and is stopped after a predetermined fluctuation time. be done.

When the game ball enters the starting port (here, the first starting winning port 62, the 2-1 starting winning port 63A, or the 2-2 starting winning port 63B), a predetermined fluctuation start as described later If the condition (special figure variation start condition) is established, the special symbol (described later) is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 . The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (jackpot lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. .

In the effect display device 60 described above, the effect display related to the special symbols is performed. This effect display is based on the difference between whether the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner or when they are stopped, and whether the stop display mode of the special symbols is a big win or a losing one. In relation to this, various predetermined effects are performed.

When a big hit occurs, the player aims at the area on the right side of the game area 52 and shoots the game ball. Then, when the game ball passes through the operation opening 68 provided in the upper part of the second starting opening unit 63, the state shifts to a state in which a big hit game is possible. That is, when a big hit occurs, the actuation port 68 functions as a so-called role interlocking actuation port (ball entry port of the accessory continuous actuation device) until the game ball is detected. Then, the player continues hitting to the right and causes the game ball to flow down in the area on the right side of the game area 52 .

In the above-described jackpot game in which the special game is executed, the unit game in which the big winning slot device 90 operates and the big winning slot (not shown) is opened is repeated multiple times. Furthermore, special games include those in which a unit game is repeated a maximum number of times and those in which a unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. As the maximum number of times, 16 times (16R (round)) can be exemplified, and as the number of times less than the maximum number of times, 6 times (6R), 2 times (2R), etc. can be exemplified. In addition, although there is another small winning game as a game for operating the big winning opening device 90, this small winning game will be described later.

In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the corresponding big winning hole, or when the total open time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds), The end condition is satisfied and the big winning opening is closed. The total opening time as a condition for ending a unit game indicates that the upper limit is set even if the opening of the big winning opening is divided multiple times during one unit game. ing. In order to increase the degree of technical intervention by opening the big winning opening multiple times in a unit game, and to make it possible to easily get the ball by opening it once, to give a wide range of game characteristics during the big win. The mode of opening the big winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game feature is adopted in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of games described above are the first game in which the first start winning port 62 is used, and the 2-1 starting winning port 63A and the 2-2 starting winning port 63B are used. It can be divided into a second game and a second game. In this embodiment, no priority is provided between the first game and the second game, and the first game and the second game are executed in parallel. Therefore, a situation may occur in which the first game and the second game are executed simultaneously.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the special game is finished, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. This specific game is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game in a mode different from the above-described special game. In this embodiment, as the specific game, a probability variation game (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation"), a variable time reduction game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction"), and a ball entry easy game are provided. As the specific game, there is a game in which only one of a variable probability game, a time saving game, and a game with easy ball entry is performed, and there is also a game in which a plurality of specific games are performed at the same time.

When the specific game is executed, a notification regarding the shooting position and shooting timing of the game ball recommended by the image and sound of the effect display device 60 (for example, a right-hand hitting effect to encourage right-hand hitting) is performed. When the player increases the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 20 clockwise to strengthen the shooting force and shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 is shot. , enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. - 特許庁Furthermore, the game ball released from the center ornament 64 hits a plurality of game nails and other structures and falls in a direction corresponding to the way it hits.

Some of the many game balls released from the center decoration 64 pass through the operation opening 68 (see FIG. 1) and are detected by the passage detection device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the operation port 68, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7), and the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped in a predetermined win mode. Then, the normal electric accessory of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is opened for a predetermined time according to the winning mode.

In this embodiment, it is possible to guide the game ball that has reached the right side of the game area 52 to the periphery of the second starting opening unit 63 and the big winning opening device 90 with a nail or the like. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a game that facilitates entry is added to the time saving that is a specific game, and during the time saving, the opening of the normal electric role is extended by the easy entry game, and the normal electric role Probability fluctuations of objects and time saving of ordinary electric accessories are executed singly or in a predetermined combination. Then, during the time saving, when the normal electric accessory of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is opened once, one or a plurality of game balls can enter the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A. It's like

When hitting to the right, there are game balls that pass through the operation port 68 as described above and game balls that do not pass. FIG. 18(b) schematically shows the second starting port unit 63 and the manner in which game balls flow down therearound. As shown in the figure, in the front part of the operating port 68, the flow of the game ball toward the operating port 68 (indicated by arrow A) and the flow of the game ball deviating to the left and right of the operating port 68 when viewed from the front ( (indicated by arrows B and C) occur.

In this embodiment, the game ball deviated to the right side of the operating port 68 as indicated by arrow C enters the second starting port unit 63 from the right side of the operating port 68 and reaches a position about the middle of the second starting port unit 63. Then, it is taken into the game board 50 as an out ball that does not return to the game area 52.例文帳に追加A game ball that becomes an out ball in the second start opening unit 63 is also detected by the out ball detection device 82 (FIG. 3), which is the above-mentioned out opening sensor.

Subsequently, as indicated by arrow A, the game ball that has entered the operating port 68 toward the operating port 68, as indicated by arrow D, moves toward the 2-1 starting winning port 63A. Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball heading for the 2-1 start winning opening 63A, for example, if there is no particular thing such as being flipped sideways by the game ball flowing down from the side, the 2-1 It is designed to reach the start winning opening 63A.

If the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is closed, the game ball headed for the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A does not enter the 2-1 start winning opening 63A, and is shown by arrow E. , flowing down to the left when viewed from the front. On the other hand, if the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A is in the open state, the game ball headed for the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A as indicated by the above-mentioned arrow D is the second -1 The ball enters the start winning opening 63A. Then, the game ball entering the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is taken into the game board 50 after being detected by the 2-1 start winning detection device 75A (FIG. 3).

Some of the game balls that did not enter the 2-1 start winning opening 63A (indicated by arrow B), and as indicated by arrow E, the second start of the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A in the closed state The game ball guided to the opening shutter 67 flows down the left side of the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A and goes toward the 2-2 starting winning opening 63B. The part directly above the 2-2 start winning opening 63B is outside the 2nd starting opening unit 63, and the game ball heading for the 2-2 starting winning opening 63B is once released to the outside of the 2nd starting opening unit 63. The game ball is visually recognized by the player as a game ball. Then, the game ball coming out of the second starting port unit 63 enters the 2-2 starting winning port 63B as indicated by the arrow G, or enters the 2-2 starting winning port 63B as indicated by the arrows H and J. It deviates to the left and right of the mouth 63B.

The game ball that has entered the 2-2 start winning opening 63B as indicated by the arrow G is not taken into the back side of the game board 50 in the second starting opening unit 63, and is placed in front of the big winning opening device 90 and the like. , and head to the production attacker 93 .

Also, as indicated by the arrow J, the game ball deviated to the right side of the 2-2 start winning opening 63B when viewed from the front reaches the upper surface of the big winning opening device 90. The upper surface of the large winning opening device 90 is inclined low toward the center of the game area 52, and the upper surface of the large winning opening device 90 flows down to the left when viewed from the front. When the big winning opening shutter 91 is operated and the big winning opening 92 is open, the game ball deviated to the right side of the 2-2 start winning opening 63B also enters the big winning opening 92.例文帳に追加Here, in order to decelerate the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the large winning opening device 90, it is possible to form, for example, a concave portion or a convex portion that can interfere with the game ball on the upper surface of the large winning opening device 90. is.

As shown by the arrow H, the game ball that deviates to the left side of the 2-2 start winning opening 63B as seen from the front also reaches the upper surface of the big winning opening device 90. Then, if the big winning opening shutter 91 is operated and the big winning opening 92 is open, the game ball that deviates to the left side of the 2-2 start winning opening 63B also enters the big winning opening 92.例文帳に追加

The flow path of the game ball indicated by the arrows G to J is only an example, and the arrows G to J may be changed depending on the situation such as the arrangement of the game nails, the spacing between the game nails, or the interference between the game balls. The game ball may flow down in a route other than the route indicated by . Furthermore, even if the big winning hole 92 is open, there may be a game ball that does not enter the big winning hole 92 and deviates from the big winning hole 92 .

When the large winning opening shutter 91 does not operate and the large winning opening 92 is closed, the game ball that has reached the large winning opening device 90 is positioned in front of the first start winning opening 62 as indicated by the arrow K. , and head toward the out port (58). In addition, when the big winning hole 92 is in the open state, the game ball that deviates from the big winning hole 92 also goes to the out hole (58) as indicated by the arrow K. Then, these game balls do not enter the first start winning hole 62, but are taken into the out hole (58) and become out balls. Here, the game ball that did not enter the big winning hole 92 may go to the out hole (58) through a route other than the route indicated by the arrow K.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 92 that is open is detected by the large winning detection device 78 (FIG. 3), it is not taken in as it is on the back side of the game board 50, but all , toward the effect attacker 93 located below. Furthermore, all the game balls detected (winning) at the 2-2 start winning opening 63B are also directed to the effect attacker 93.

Then, all the game balls headed to the performance attacker 93 are taken into the opening of the performance attacker 93 and collected if the performance attacker 93 is open. In this embodiment, an effect is executed for the player to make it difficult to visually recognize the states of the effect attacker 93 and the falling door 94 using the above-described decorative portion 90a. This effect will be described later.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, various factors such as the structure, arrangement, and the relationship with the peripheral board surface parts (such as game nails) related to the 2-1 start winning opening 63A are By opening, it is determined that a relatively large percentage (for example, about 90%) of game balls hit to the right enter. For this reason, when the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A performs the opening operation, a relatively large number of game balls are taken into the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A without reaching the big winning opening device 90.

Also, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out is one when one ball enters the 2-1 start prize-winning port 63A or the 2-2 start prize-winning port 63B. Also, when one ball enters the big winning hole 92, the number of prize balls to be paid out is fifteen. In other words, the number of prize balls paid out for one entering ball is relatively small in the 2-1 start prize-winning port 63A and the 2-2 start prize-winning port 63B, and relatively small in the big prize winning port 92. has increased to

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second starting opening unit 63, the big winning opening device 90, and the first starting winning opening are arranged so that the right-handed game ball does not enter the first starting winning opening 62 (FIG. 1). The positional relationship and arrangement of the openings 62 and the peripheral game nails are determined.
<Summary of winning types>

Next, the types of jackpots in the above-described first game and second game will be described. First, as the jackpots, there are provided a jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 16 times (hereinafter also referred to as a "16R jackpot") and a jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 6 times (hereinafter also called a "6R jackpot"). .

The above-mentioned unit game is started in the special game with the opening of the large winning opening in the large winning opening device 90, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 (more than 1) game balls fall in, the game ends and the big winning opening is closed. A special game that repeats such a unit game is based on a game accompanied by a so-called ball-out (sometimes referred to as a ball-out) for the purpose of allowing a player to win a game ball. Furthermore, among the various jackpots, the 16R jackpot and the 6R jackpot are intended to make the player win a relatively large number of game balls.

However, it is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide, for example, a 16R jackpot or a part of the 16R jackpot that does not change probability (15R normal or 7R normal) as part of the jackpot. In addition, for example, even if it is a 16R jackpot, the opening period of the big prize hole is short, and only the ball that is substantially the same as the 6R jackpot can be obtained (16R variable (actual 6R)), or a 6R jackpot Even so, it is possible to provide a situation in which it is almost impossible to obtain a ball (for example, only a minimum amount (for example, one ball) enters the big winning hole 92 in each R).

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state such as the above-mentioned probability variation, time saving, etc. is generated for a predetermined specific jackpot. As an occurrence mode of such a specific game state, for example, it is possible to provide a jackpot that does not provide at least one of the privilege functions such as probability variation, time saving, and easy ball entry game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit accompanied by only a variable probability or a big win accompanied only by a reduction in working hours. Furthermore, it is also possible to vary the types of big wins depending on the difference in the duration of the probability variation and the difference in the duration of the short working hours. In addition, when the electric chewing support is also performed during the time saving, the "duration of the time saving" can be rephrased as the "duration of the electric chewing support". Furthermore, it is also possible to execute only the electric chew support out of the time saving and the electric chew support.

However, the combinations of the big hits and the variable probability, time saving, etc. are not limited to those of this embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, probability variation may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all of the 16R jackpots in this embodiment are 16R jackpots with variable probability (15R variable probability), and all 6R jackpots are 6R jackpots with variable probability (6R variable probability). In addition, in this embodiment, various game features are realized by state transitions between various jackpots, specific game states, and small wins described later. Details of the transition will be described later.
<Hit other than the jackpot>

In addition, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a kind of win other than the big win. In the first game (or second game), when this small winning occurs, a small winning game is executed in which the large winning opening 92 in the large winning opening device 90 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, once). It has become so. In this embodiment, the probability (expected value) of occurrence of a small win in the second game is larger than that of various kinds of big wins (here, all kinds of big wins including those in the variable probability state). The lottery mode and the control mode of the small winning game will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<<Configuration of Main Control Display Device>>

Next, the aforementioned main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be described with reference to FIG. The main control display device 53 on the game board side, as shown in FIG. It is configured. In this embodiment, the number of LED indicator lights in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lights in each stage are arranged at regular intervals in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the intervals between the LED indicator lamps in the vertical positional relationship are also constant for all 18 pieces.

In the main control display device 53, the 10 LED indicator lights on the right end in the upper row when viewed from the front are used for information display according to Special Figure 1, and the 10 LED indicator lights on the right end in the lower row are shown in Special Figure 2. It is designed to be used for such information display. And, in the upper stage and the lower stage, the two LED indicator lamps on the right end constitute a first special symbol storage display section 83 and a second special symbol storage display section 84 indicating the number of pending memories. The eight LED indicator lamps arranged on the left side of the first special symbol storage display section 83 constitute the first special symbol display section 70 described above, and the eight LED indicators arranged on the left side of the second special symbol storage display section 84 The LED indicator lamps constitute the second special symbol display section 71 described above.

The first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of variable display and stop display of the first special symbol related to the first game by the operation modes of the eight LED indicator lamps arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 62, and the variation display thereof is predetermined. A big win is generated and a special game is executed when the game is stopped in the winning mode. In addition, when the first special symbol display unit 70 stops displaying the first special symbol, a maximum of 255 (=2̂8) -1) The type identification information can be displayed.

Similarly, for the second special symbol display section 71 described above, due to the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lamps arranged in a row in the horizontal direction, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, a maximum of 255 (=2 ̂8) Kind identification information can be displayed.

Furthermore, in the upper stage, four LED indicator lamps arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display section 70 are normally used for information display related to the symbol (normal pattern). The two LED indicator lamps arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display portion 70 constitute a normal symbol memory display portion 85 for displaying the number of reserved stored symbols of normal symbols. The two LED display lamps arranged side by side form a normal symbol display portion 59 .

The normal symbol display section 59 performs variable display and stop display of normal symbols according to the operation modes of the two LED indicator lamps. Then, the normal symbol display section 59 can display up to 3 (=2^2-1) types of identification information at the time of stop display.

In addition, a round number display section 86 is composed of four LED display lights, two LED display lights arranged on the left side of the normal symbol display section 59 in the upper stage and two LED display lights at the left end of the lower stage located therebelow. Furthermore, the four LED indicator lights between the round number display section 86 and the second special symbol display section 71 in the lower row are, from the left, a first state display section (state indicator light 1) 87a, a second state display section (status indicator lamp 2) 87b, a third status indicator (status indicator 3) 87c, and a fourth status indicator (status indicator 4) 87d.

The above-mentioned first state display unit 87a is designed to light up when the probability variation function related to the special figure is activated, and the second state display unit 87b is designed to light up when the probability variation function is activated according to the normal figure. there is In addition, the second state display portion 87b is also lit up during the open extension, which is a so-called electric support (electric support) state. Further, the third state display portion 87c is used as a hitting (right hitting) state indicator lamp. Further, the fourth state display portion 87d is used as an error indicator lamp.

Here, the above-described third state display portion 87c (beating state indicator lamp) is lit up not only during the electric support state but also during the jackpot. It should be noted that during the big hit, even if the game is in continuous operation, the flag (electrical support flag) for setting the electrical support state is turned off. In addition, the third state display section 87c can also be lit in a state other than these states (normal time) such as when the normal electric accessory is long open.

The main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the aforementioned main board 102 as shown in FIG. Various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102 . In addition, in FIG. 3, only the normal symbol display portion 59, the first special symbol display portion 70, and the second special symbol display portion 71 are shown among the various display portions in the main control display device 53.
<<Main control display unit functions>>

When the game ball passes through the operation port 68, the normal symbol display portion 59 flashes, and the normal symbol variation display is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) elapses after the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal pattern is displayed in a lost mode (disappeared mode), after the lapse of a predetermined stop time (normal pattern stop fixed time), if there is a ball entering the subsequent operation port, normally The next variable display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined win mode (hit mode), similar to the case of losing, while shifting to the next fluctuation display, the normal symbols stopped and displayed earlier win. Depending on the mode, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

The number of reservations related to the normal pattern lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the operating port 68 during the normal pattern fluctuation, and indicates the number of normal pattern lotteries in which the normal pattern fluctuation display has not yet been executed. That is, when the pattern variation performed earlier in the normal pattern storage and display unit 85 is not completed, the variation start condition is not established, and when the pattern variation is completed, the variation start condition is established and suspended. Based on the stored lottery result (reserved lottery result), a new pattern variation is started. The upper limit of the number of reserved items is four, and the number of reserved items is not exceeded.

The display of four types of numerical values by the normal symbol memory display unit 85 is, for example, when the number of reservations is 0 (no reservations), both are turned off, and when the number of reservations is 1, one of them is turned on. It is possible to do so in such a manner that the other is turned off. Also, if the number of reservations is 2, both lights up, if the number of reservations is 3, either one lights up and the other blinks, and if the number of reservations is 4, both blink. can be displayed.

The display of the reserved number of the first special symbols by the first special symbol storage and display unit 83 described above is performed by displaying four types of information using two LED indicator lamps as one set. The display of the number of reserved second special symbols by the above-described second special symbol storage and display unit 84 is also performed by displaying four types of information using two LED indicator lamps as one set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned game situation arises in which the player should hit to the right, a display is performed in a predetermined manner using the third state display section 87c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). In this embodiment, the third state display section 86c is set to be turned off when the game situation is left-handed, and is lit when the right-handed game situation is.
<Configuration related to setting change function>

Next, the configuration related to the setting change described above and the setting change method will be described. FIG. 5(a) shows a partially enlarged view of the state in which the main board 102 is housed in a transparent board case 801, and FIG. It is enlarged and shown schematically. In FIG. 5A, a substrate case 801 is formed in a box shape with a split structure (for example, a split structure) from a colorless and transparent plastic material.

As a divided structure of the substrate case 801, for example, a substrate holder that holds the main substrate 102 is combined with a cover, and the substrate holder and the cover are joined via a caulking structure that leaves a trace at the time of separation. can be adopted. In the substrate case 801, a connector 802 (only a part of which is indicated by a reference numeral) used for connection with other devices such as the sub-main substrate 301 is formed with a size that does not create a gap as much as possible. is exposed through a closed opening.

The main board 102 is visible through a transparent board case 801. In FIG. The spherical state indicator 808 is indicated by a dashed line, and illustration of other devices is omitted. Among these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area in which test terminals are mounted only when a ball payout test or the like is performed in the product testing stage, and the test terminals are not mounted on the main substrate 102 in the mass production stage. not

The setting display 807 described above displays the selected setting value only when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Then, the setting display 807 displays the current setting regarding the setting value for differentiating the operation probability of the role product continuous operation device (the operation probability of the device that continuously operates the special electric role product, the so-called jackpot probability). Values can be displayed. Further, the setting display 807 uses a 7-segment display for one digit. Here, in this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, a dot display portion is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807 .

A setting key cylinder (also referred to as a “setting key switch”) 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as a “setting change switch”) 810 are arranged near the setting display 807 . A setting change operation unit 811 is configured by the change button 810 and the like. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the setting change operation unit 811 opens a setting change opening/closing lid (hereinafter referred to as "opening/closing lid") 812 of the circuit board case 801, thereby changing the state shown in FIG. 5(a). It is exposed as shown.

The opening/closing lid 812 is, for example, integrally formed with the substrate case 801 through a resin hinge, and is opened as indicated by an arrow B by pulling the protruding knob portion 813 with fingers against elastic force. can be exemplified. When the open/close lid 812 is to be closed, it is laid down (not shown) from the state shown in FIG.

The aforementioned ball entry state display device 808 is used as a performance display unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and is capable of displaying a base for each game state (the value of the number of prize balls per number of shots). In this embodiment, as shown by the solid line in the enlarged lower right part of FIG. In addition, a dot display section (reference numeral omitted) is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display for each digit of the ball entry state display 808 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the ball entry state display 808, the setting change operation section 811, and the setting display 807 are wrapped in plan view (rear view of the gaming machine). are arranged so that they do not overlap (so that they do not overlap). In addition, the entering state indicator 808 and the setting indicator 807 are arranged with a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more) between them so as to prevent misrecognition of the display.

In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5(b) is the free end for opening the game machine frame 11, and the setting change operating section 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end side. By doing so, consideration is given to making it possible to easily change the set values, etc., while the ball entry state indicator 808 is arranged on the rotation axis (fixed end) side when the game machine frame 11 is opened. Consideration is given to prevent the display information from being unintentionally viewed by the player when the game machine frame is opened. Of course, if priority is given to prevention of tampering when changing set values, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 should be formed on the right side of the main board 102 (on the side of the rotation axis of the game machine frame 11) when viewed from the front. Just do it.

Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above-mentioned points, an opening/closing lid 812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the setting change operation section 811 so that the setting change operation section 811 cannot be easily accessed. The operation unit 811 for changing settings is configured not to be exposed except when changing work or confirming setting information. The setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 will be described below with reference to FIG. 5B.

First, the upper surface of the substrate case 801, which is in a positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811, is arranged so that the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion opening (reference numeral omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809. Also, an opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, a partition wall such as a side wall is formed from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main substrate 102 so that access to other electronic components (for example, the CPU 501) on the main substrate 102 cannot be made through the opening 816. It's becoming Also, a setting key cylinder 809 formed with a setting key insertion port (reference numeral omitted) corresponding to the opening 816 and a push-type setting change button 810 are arranged vertically when viewed from the back of the pachinko game machine 10. Further, an opening/closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the substrate case 801 so as to be openable and closable while being urged in a direction to always close the opening 816 .

Next, a brief description will be given of an operation method for changing settings, etc., and an overview of the actions of changing settings and displaying settings. When confirming the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and rotate the key to the right. Then, without pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, if the range of the setting value is "1" to "6", the corresponding numerical value) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed by the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode ( Some segments (here, dot portions) are driven to light up to indicate that it is in the setting confirmation mode). In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is activated (for example, when the game machine is activated (for example, a state in which control based on an input related to the progress of the game can be executed, such as detection of a winning at the starting winning opening), the setting value change processing is performed. is configured in such a way that

On the other hand, when changing the setting value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the open/close lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the biasing force, and the setting key is pressed. A setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion port of the cylinder 809 and rotated clockwise. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current set value is displayed blinking on the setting display 807 formed of 7-segment LEDs, and some segments (here, dot portions) are extinguished (extinguished) to indicate that it is in the setting change mode. Is displayed.

In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new setting value obtained by adding 1 to the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting display 807 . The manager of the game arcade operates the setting change button 810 so as to obtain an arbitrary (target) set value. In this embodiment, if the set value at the time of power-on is "1", each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once, "1", "2", ..., "5", "6", "1" is changed. ” is changed.

Then, by operating the setting change button, when the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated counterclockwise in a state in which the setting value is changed to an arbitrary value (an arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting display 807), the setting value is changed. After the change processing is completed, the setting display 807 lights up the current set value for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1000 ms), and also lights up some segments (here, dots). and dots are both extinguished.
<Configuration and basic display contents of the effect display device>

Next, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60 . In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as the effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 and the story display are performed. Although various images are displayed in the effect display device 60, here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 displays the effect as shown in FIGS. A variable presentation with variable display of a design (also called a decorative design or the like) 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect pattern 190 is composed of a left effect pattern 190a, a middle effect pattern 190b, and a right effect pattern 190c. In the following description, the left, middle, and right effects patterns 190a to 190c may be referred to as "production patterns 190" or "production patterns 190a to 190c" depending on the situation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the production pattern 190 has seven types of element patterns (symbolic element production patterns) having the meanings of symbols of numbers "1" to "7". In addition, here, in order not to complicate the explanation, seven kinds of element patterns having the meanings of symbols of numerals "1" to "7" are used for explanation. It is also possible to employ symbols having meanings other than numbers, such as . Furthermore, as elemental patterns, it is possible to use both those having numerical meanings and those having other meanings. Further, in a broad sense, a special pattern that appears only during a certain fluctuation in order to execute a special effect (pseudo continuous notice or specific zone notice, which will be described later) is also included in the effect pattern 190 in a broad sense. Here, as special symbols, special symbols that are usually displayed by being added to or replaced with symbols are also included in the performance symbols 190 in a broad sense.

Along with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-described effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8(a)). In this embodiment, the variable display of the performance symbols is performed by individually moving (vertical scrolling) the left performance symbols 190a to the right performance symbols 190c in the vertical direction so that the above element symbols appear in the display area 194 sequentially. Executed by As for the direction of scrolling of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, it is possible to adopt various modes such as the horizontal direction, rotation, or turning, in addition to the vertical direction.

Also, the effect pattern 190 may form a so-called "reach" combination as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the production patterns 190 (here, the left production pattern 190a and the right production pattern 190c) are the same number patterns such as "7" and "7", the same meaning, Alternatively, a combination is formed by symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this "reach", the remaining one pattern (here, medium production pattern 190b) other than the production patterns 190a and 190c that make up the combination of the reach is fluctuating and cannot be combined with other production patterns. It's becoming

As the display mode of the effect pattern 190, many types of "reach" and other various modes can be adopted. Then, in this embodiment, a special effect (symbol stock effect as a stock effect) using a predetermined type of effect pattern (here, the effect pattern of "7"), and a predetermined effect considering a lottery for a small win (Small hit expectation game effect) is performed, and the details thereof will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect pattern 190 are performed. For example, in the example of FIGS. 8(a) and (b), the first pending number display section 196, the second pending number display section 197, and the reduced production pattern display area 361 appear at the bottom of the screen, but these details will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to this. can be anything. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to having only one display body, and may be composed of a combination of a plurality of display bodies by adding an additional display body, for example.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and configure a gimmick with the additional display body. Usually, an additional display body is placed outside the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 so as not to obstruct the visibility of the display area 194, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, an additional display may appear in front of display area 194 .
<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machines>

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the main components of the electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a power board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Of these, the power supply board 251 is connected to the payout control board 103, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 106, the launch control board 107, and the like. A main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via a frame relay terminal board 108 . Further, the main board 102 is connected to a main pattern display board (also referred to as a "symbol display board") 256 that constitutes the aforementioned main control display device 53, and a sub-main board 301. The sub-main board 301 has , and the aforementioned sub-sub-board 302 are connected.

The power supply board 251 of the above various configurations is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2). The power supply board 251 is connected to the frame effect connection board 300 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate (not shown). A ball handling board and the like used for coin handling are connected.

A touch switch 310 provided on the firing handle 20 (see FIG. 1) is connected to the firing control board 105 described above. Although not shown, the touch switch 310 is connected to a firing touch lever and a locking metal fitting for grounding. A touch switch (also referred to as a “touch sensor”) 310 detects when a player, amusement arcade clerk, or the like touches the shooting handle 20 with a finger, and changes the form of the output signal.

Further, the firing control board 105 is connected with a firing intensity volume 311, a firing stop switch 312, and the firing device 43 described above. Of these, the firing strength volume 1311 is used to change the firing strength of the game ball according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 20 . The firing stop switch 312 is used to stop firing by detecting an operation with a part of the finger (such as the thumb) that grips the firing handle 20 .

Power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. 3, a main control display device 53, passage detectors 69a and 69b, and a normal electric motor are connected to the main board 102 via a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board (not shown). Thing solenoid 76, 1st start prize detection device 74, 2-1 start prize detection device 75A, 2-2 start prize detection device 75B, general prize detection device 73, big prize detection device 78, big prize opening (open) A solenoid 80, a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor (not shown), etc. are connected. Here, in this embodiment, the connection of the first start winning detection device 74, the 2-1 start winning detection device 75A, and the 2-2 starting winning detection device 75B to the main board 102 is the game board connection. It is done directly without going through the board or the game board relay terminal board.

Electric power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the sub-main board 301 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303 . Furthermore, the sub-main board 301 includes the above-described frame connection board 303 and frame effect connection board 300, as well as the glass frame effect connection relay board 305 and the glass frame effect connection board 306. Each device is connected.

Devices for presentation in the pachinko game machine 10 include a frame illumination L2 board 317, a frame illumination R2 board 318, a (left) speaker 21 (L), a (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, a cross key (cross button) substrate, effect button substrate, lifting motor, effect button (operation button) motor, button position sensor, etc. are also provided, but illustration of these is omitted in FIG. are doing.

The sub-main board 301 is also connected to game board equipment, image display equipment, audio control equipment, and the like. Among these devices, there is a board surface illumination connection board 331 as a device for the game board. This board surface illumination connection board 331 is connected to the sub-main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and effect interface board 304 described above. A center illumination board 332 used for illumination of the center decoration 64 is connected to the board face illumination connection board 331 . In addition, although illustration is omitted, the board surface illumination connection board 331 is connected with a production sensor board, other illumination boards, a production motor, and the like. Here, although illustration is omitted, the effect interface board 304 is connected with various electric decoration boards and effect motors.

The image display device connected to the sub-main board 301 includes a sub-sub board (image control board) 302. The sub-sub board 302 has a liquid crystal unit (also called a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A board 336. ) 42 is connected. Here, in this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, another liquid crystal unit connected to the presentation interface board 304 via the image display connection B board is also provided. Further, the aforementioned audio control equipment connected to the sub-main board 301 includes an audio control board (audio board) 339 and an audio ROM (ROM) board 340 .

Next, the configuration of the main board 102, the payout control board 103 and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the main board 102 is mounted with a CPU (main CPU) 501 , a ROM (main ROM) 502 and an RWM 503 . Of these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. Note that "ROM" and "RWM" described in this embodiment are general concepts that include both those built into the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

In addition to the CPU 501, the CPU device mounted on the main substrate 102 includes a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers, and an 8-bit random number circuit, although not shown. A random number circuit for Of these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers, which are built-in random numbers.

Further, the main substrate 102 is equipped with an input/output port 505 for inputting/outputting data to/from a device external to the main substrate 102 . Further, various circuit units such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main substrate 102, though not shown.

The ROM 502 described above stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform game-related processing, predetermined control data, and the like. The RWM 503 described above rewritably stores data required for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the game program is executed by the CPU 501 .

Subsequently, the payout control board 103 is equipped with a CPU (payout CPU) 511 , a ROM (payout ROM) 512 and an RWM 513 . Among them, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. The ROM 512 also stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform payout-related processing, predetermined control data, and the like. In addition, the RWM 513 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, etc. when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501 .

The sub-main board 301 described above includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. . The input side of the input port 527 is connected to the output side of the main substrate 102, and the output side of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, and the like.

The CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (instruction) for symbol display transmitted from the main board 102 . The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 521. The work RWM 523 is for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. memory.

Data transmission/reception between the main substrate 102 and the sub-main substrate 301 described above is performed in a one-way communication mode from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301 (one-way communication). Since one-way communication is ensured between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the main board 102. FIG. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub-main board 301 . In order to enable such one-way communication, for example, a communication restriction means (buffer circuit, etc.) is mounted on the main substrate 102, and data output to the sub-main substrate 301 is controlled by this communication restriction means. It is possible to do it through

The sub-sub-board 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, bus lines (not shown), and the like. Additionally, the video controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540 . The input side of the input port 538 is connected to the output side of the sub-main board 301, and the output side of the input port 538 is connected to devices such as the CPU 531, work RWM 532, program ROM 533, and the like.

The video memory 540 described above is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 60. By rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540, the display content (frame image) of the effect display device 60 can be changed. ) is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 60 . The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Further, the patterns are superimposed in the order of the layers determined in advance and displayed on the effect display device 60. - 特許庁
<Power supply and data backup>

The aforementioned power supply board 251 includes a power supply section 541 for supplying power to each section of the pachinko game machine 10 and an initialization switch circuit section 543 having an initialization switch 544 . The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside, and applies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc., to the main substrate 102, the payout control substrate 103, And supply to other prescribed equipment.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 sends an initialization signal for clearing the backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by, for example, the administrator of the amusement arcade when the power is turned on. is equipped with a circuit that outputs As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can hold (back up) stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. Then, when the pachinko game machine 10 is powered on, when the above-described initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the data backed up in the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 (backup data) is restored. cleared. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when the power is turned on, the state changes to the setting change state according to the input state of the initialization switch 544 and the input state of the setting key. Whether or not to perform initialization, the range of initialization, etc. can be determined according to the signal from the initialization switch circuit section 543 and the input signal associated with the setting key.

The initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103 so that the backed-up data can be cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. can be Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated when the power is turned on, the backup data for the main board 102 and part of the backup data for the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared when the payout initialization switch (not shown) is further operated.

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the pachinko game machine 10 is powered off, so that data can be held (backed up). In other words, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to memories and areas (not shown) for temporarily storing various data. This backup area 503a is used for the stack pointer and the , registers, and I/O values. When the power is turned on normally or when the power failure is resolved, the state of the main board 102 and the like is restored to the state before the power shutdown based on the information in the backup area 503a.

Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by power-off processing (described later) when the power is turned off, and each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by power-on processing (to be described later) when the power is turned on. . As the backup area 503a, an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply can be used.

Also, the RWM 513 in the payout control board 103, like the RWM 503 in the main board 102, is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 after the pachinko game machine 10 is powered off, so that data can be held (backed up). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to memory and areas (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a is used to store the values of the stack pointer, each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power interruption when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. area. Then, along with the normal power-up and the cancellation of the power failure, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power shutdown based on the information in the backup area 513a.

Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by power-off processing in the payout control board 103 at the time of power-off, and restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is performed at the time of power-on, power-on processing in the payout control board 103 ( control start processing). As the backup area 513a, as in the case of the main board 102, an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power supply can be used.

The main substrate 102 described above is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 that monitors power interruption due to power failure or the like as described above. This power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main substrate 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control substrate 103 when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors a stable DC voltage (for example, 30 volts), which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251, and when this voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage. In this case, it detects the occurrence of a power failure (power cutoff) and outputs the above-described power failure signal. Based on the input of such a power-off signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute predetermined power-off processing.

Note that the electrical characteristics of the main substrate 102 and the like are such that even after the DC stable voltage drops below the predetermined voltage at which the power interruption signal is output, there is sufficient time to execute predetermined processing such as power shutdown processing. During this period, the voltage output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 . However, not limited to this, for example, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or is supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 separately in separate systems. You may do so.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be arranged in a part other than the main board 102 . For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply board 251 and a power failure signal may be input to each board from the power failure monitoring circuit part 506 on the power supply board 251 . It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103 . Furthermore, the function of the power supply board 251 may be performed by the main board 102 . In this case, it is conceivable to form the power source section 541 on the main board 102 .

Furthermore, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided in the payout control board 103, and the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may each output a power failure signal and perform a power failure process based on the power failure signal. Further, out of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, only the payout control board 103 may be provided with the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506, and the power failure signal may be transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

Here, the aforementioned main CPU 501, payout CPU 511, etc. are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. Triggers for the execution of the above-described power-off processing include hardware that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) when a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. Periodic interrupt processing based on settings, such as software-like processing that checks a power-off flag that is set when a voltage drop is detected.

In this embodiment, power-off processing is performed based on the hardware trigger of NMI. Signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed by, for example, inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal can occur not only when a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506, but also due to noise entering the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. It should be noted that the shift to power-off processing can also be performed based on a software method. It is also possible to set a power-off flag based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal and use it as a trigger for executing power-off processing. Here, data is backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, but this is not limitative. It is also possible to perform data backup in the same manner as the board 102 or the payout control board 103 .

Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of the present embodiment performs various functions such as determination of entering a ball, lottery, and command transmission by the functions of the components described above (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 6 shows representative functional means in each of the main substrate 102, sub-main substrate 301, and sub-sub-substrate 302. FIG. Among these, the main board 102 includes the entering ball determination means 110, the first lottery means 111, the second lottery means 112, the normal figure lottery means 113, the reservation control means 114, the main display control means 115, the special game control means 116, Specific game control means 117, opening and closing control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120 and the like are provided. Then, the main board 102 uses these functional means to perform lottery for special symbols, lottery for normal symbols, hold control, main control display, special game, specific game, opening/closing control, advance information, and so on. Execute notifications, etc.

The above-described ball entry determining means 110 detects the entry of a game ball into each winning opening (actuating opening, various starting winning openings, large winning opening, general winning opening, out opening, etc.) by sensors provided in each winning opening. Based on the signal output from
<< Winning Lottery Function for Special Designs >>

The above-described first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery based on the entry of the ball into the first start prize winning opening 62 . The first lottery means 111 has the functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121 , a first win/loss determination means 122 , a first symbol determination means 123 and a first pattern determination means 124 . The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display section 70 of the aforementioned main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7).

Similarly, the above-described second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the ball entering the 2-1 start prize-winning opening 63A or the 2-2 start prize-winning opening 63B. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125 , a second win/loss determination means 126 , a second symbol determination means 127 and a second pattern determination means 128 . The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbols stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display section 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

The first lottery value acquiring means 121 provided in the above-mentioned first lottery means 111 converts the value of the jackpot random number related to the first lottery into the first lottery lottery value when the ball enters the first start winning hole 62. to get as In addition, the second lottery value acquiring means 125 provided in the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 performs the second lottery when the ball enters the 2-1 start winning opening 63A or the 2-2 starting winning opening 63B. is obtained as a second win/fail lottery value.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second lottery value are hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) and software random numbers (soft random numbers). generated by the calculation (addition) used. A built-in random number generated by, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit is used as the hardware random number, and a value updated for each interrupt by a software random number generating program is used as the software random number. Either one of hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used.

A first success/failure determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 performs a success/failure determination based on the first success/failure lottery value, and determines whether the first success/failure lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (hit value) for winning. to judge. Similarly, the second success/failure determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 performs a success/failure determination based on the above-mentioned second success/failure lottery value, and the second success/failure lottery value becomes a predetermined value (hit value) to be a hit. Determine if applicable. In the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 122 and the second success/failure determination means 126, a success/failure determination table (for example, FIG. 9 ( a)) is used.

Here, FIG. 9(a) schematically shows the configuration of the success/failure determination table. The normal variable probability jackpot shown in FIG. 9(a) indicates a random number range that always results in a big hit, and the variable probability jackpot indicates a random value range that results in a big hit only at variable probability. It is. FIG. 9(a) schematically shows only the right/wrong determination table for a part of the set values (here, setting 1) among the right/wrong determination tables provided for each set value. , numbers (assignment of numerical values), etc. are simplified and exemplified so as not to complicate the explanation.

The first symbol determining means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determining means 127 in the second lottery means 112 are selected when one of the big hits is won in the big hit lottery related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , the type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIGS. 10A and 10B). These jackpot symbol determination tables define the relationship between symbol lottery values, which are random numbers (symbol random numbers) relating to symbol determination, and types of special symbols.

The jackpot symbol determination tables shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b) also exemplify the association between the random number range and the jackpot type in a simplified manner so as not to complicate the explanation. In this embodiment, the big hit symbol determination table is divided according to the presence or absence of the electric sapo. An example of the selection ratio of the big hits according to the presence or absence of the electric sapo will be described later.

Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as "symbol random number per special symbol" or "symbol random number" related to the special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, the types of wins include small wins, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 select special symbols when winning a small win in a special symbol jackpot lottery. The type of symbol is determined based on a small hit symbol determination table (not shown).

The symbol lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting prize-winning hole, similarly to the win-or-no lottery value described above. In addition, the type of special symbol is associated with the type of winning, and the type of big winning and the presence or absence of a small winning are determined in association with the obtained symbol lottery value.

The first pattern determining means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determining means 128 in the second lottery means 112 determine the variation pattern of the special symbols in the corresponding special symbol display section based on the special figure variation pattern table. decide. The special figure variation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special figure variation patterns and the pattern lottery value, which is a random number (variation pattern random number) relating to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The pattern lottery value is obtained when the ball enters the starting prize-winning hole, similarly to the win-or-no lottery value described above. Furthermore, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is, for example, when the big hit, at the time of loss, presence or absence of reach, presence or absence of time saving, the number of reservations, the number of fluctuations after the big hit, etc. Depending on various game situations such as A plurality of different special figure variation pattern tables are provided.

The variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) related to the special symbol defines the time (variation time) from the start of variation to the stop in the variation display of the special symbol. And, the special figure fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, such as from one second or less to several tens of seconds, depending on the type. That is, in each special figure variation pattern, the variation time is set as the end condition of the variation display, and in the above-described first special symbol display portion 70 or second special symbol display portion 71 (see FIG. 7), special After the variable display of the symbols is started and a prescribed variable time elapses, the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

For many of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected during time saving, the fluctuation time is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation pattern to be selected during non-time saving. However, the special figure fluctuation pattern that can be selected when it is non-time saving and the number of reservations is 4 includes those with a short fluctuation time compared to the specific special figure fluctuation pattern during time saving there is
<<Various lottery functions related to normal patterns>>

Next, the above-mentioned general pattern lottery means 113 will be described. This general pattern lottery means 113 has general pattern lottery value acquisition means 129 , general pattern adequacy determination means 130 , general pattern determination means 131 , and general pattern pattern determination means 132 . Then, the normal pattern lottery means 113, when the passing of the game ball in the operation port 68 is detected by the above-described entering ball determination means 110, executes a lottery (normal pattern lottery) related to the normal pattern based on the detection result. do.

In this general pattern lottery, the general pattern lottery value acquiring means 129 acquires a general pattern lottery value that is a random number (normal pattern random number) related to the normal pattern, and the general pattern determination means 131 determines the general pattern determination table. Referenced. In this general pattern determination table, the correspondence relationship between the general pattern lottery value and the type of normal pattern is defined. Then, the normal pattern associated with the normal pattern lottery value is determined by the normal pattern correctness determination means 130 as to whether or not it corresponds to the hit, and if it corresponds to the hit, the type of hit is determined. be done.

In addition, the normal pattern lottery value is acquired with the entry of the ball into the operation port 68, and the normal pattern determination means 132 uses the acquired normal pattern lottery value to determine the fluctuation pattern (normal pattern fluctuation pattern ) is determined. Each normal pattern fluctuation pattern is associated with a normal pattern lottery value that is a random number related to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number), and is associated with the normal pattern lottery value obtained, and the game situation The normal figure fluctuation pattern according to is determined.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern lottery value, which is a random number related to normal symbols, and the normal pattern lottery value are created using only software random numbers.
<<Features related to holding special symbols>>

Next, the suspension control means 114 described above will be described. The reservation control means 114 has a first reservation means 133 , a second reservation means 134 and a normal figure reservation means 135 . Of these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by the entering ball if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the first special symbol is not satisfied when there is a new entering ball into the first start winning opening 62. Information (first special figure reservation storage information) related to various random numbers (first winning lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the reservation related to the first special symbol is set to 4, and the reservation related to the first special symbol is possible within a range not exceeding this upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been executed when the ball is entered is finished, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is generated before the ball is entered. If there is no suspension related to, the variation start condition related to the first special symbol is established, and a new symbol variation related to the first special symbol is permitted.

Also for the above-described second reservation means 134, when there is a new ball entering the 2-1 start winning opening 63A or the 2-2 starting winning opening 63B, the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the second special symbol is not satisfied, information related to various random numbers (second win/fail lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) obtained by entering the ball is temporarily held and stored.

When the variation display of the second special symbol that has been executed when the above-mentioned ball is entered is completed, the variation start condition related to the second special symbol is established, and a new symbol variation related to the second special symbol is established. will be allowed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to 4 as in the case of the first special symbol.

For the above-mentioned first special symbol and second special symbol, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and the special game is controlled, the fluctuation start condition is determined after the special game is finished.
<<Functions related to holding normal symbols>>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general pattern reservation means 135 will be described. The normal pattern holding means 135, when there is a ball in the operation port 68 (see FIG. 1), if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the normal pattern is not satisfied, the random number acquired by the ball (normal pattern lottery value, etc.) is temporarily retained and stored. And, until the fluctuation start condition is established, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol relating to the above-described entering ball is not permitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the reservation related to the normal design is set to 4, and the reservation related to the normal design is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit.

When the variation display of the normal symbol that has been executed when the above-mentioned ball is entered is completed and the normal electric accessory is not operating, the condition for starting the variation related to the normal symbol is established, and the new normal symbol Design variation is permitted.
<<Functions related to main control display>>

Next, the aforementioned main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 has a first special figure control means 136 , a second special figure control means 137 , a general figure control means 138 , a pending display control means 139 and other display control means 140 . Of these, the first special symbol control means 136 is the first special symbol display section 70 (see FIG. 7) according to the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111, and the variation of the first special symbol. A display (for example, a flashing display in which a predetermined portion of the LED indicator lights flash every 100 msec) is performed. Then, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the determined symbol in the first special symbol display section 70 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has passed.

Furthermore, the second special symbol control means 137 follows the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned second special symbol is established, the second special symbol display section 71 ( (see FIG. 7), the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the determined symbol in the second special symbol display section 71 after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has passed.

In addition, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned normal pattern is satisfied, the normal pattern control means 138 follows the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the normal pattern lottery means 113, and the normal pattern display unit 59 (see FIG. 7 ), the variable display of normal symbols is performed. Further, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the determined symbols in the normal symbol display portion 59 after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has passed.

Furthermore, the reservation display control means 139 displays the number of reservations related to the above-described first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol. These pending numbers are displayed in the first special symbol memory display portion 83, the second special symbol memory display portion 84, and the normal symbol memory display portion 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. will be In addition, the other display control means 140 described above controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-described first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol, and various reserved displays.
<<Features related to special games>>

Next, the aforementioned special game control means 116 will be explained. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is satisfied when the special symbols are stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the jackpot is won, and determines that the special game operating condition is met, and determines that the special game operation condition is established according to the jackpot type as described above. A special game is executed to be opened in a manner (predetermined number of times of unit game and opening pattern of big winning opening during unit game).
<<Features related to specific games>>

Subsequently, the aforementioned specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control related to the above-mentioned probability variation, time saving, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a variable probability state, a time saving state, or the like, according to the type of the big hit. The probability variable state is attached to some types of jackpots, not all types of jackpots. Further, for some jackpots, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot, and for other jackpots with variable probability, it continues until the total number of variable display times after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). . During the variable probability state, the winning probability of the big win by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than the normal time when the probability is not variable.

In addition, the time saving state is continued until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined end condition number of times (for example, 100 times) counted from the end of the special game. Furthermore, during the time saving, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 determine the time saving variation pattern so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generally shorter than the normal state. to select. Also, in this embodiment, some of the probability variable jackpots do not come with time saving.

Furthermore, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game is executed in conjunction with the execution of the time saving as the specific game, the operation of the normal electric accessory is facilitated, and at the entrance of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A It becomes easy to open the arranged second starting port shutter 67 . Opening/closing control of the second starting opening shutter 67 is controlled by opening/closing control means 118, which will be described later. It should be noted that a specific example of a mode related to the specific game will be described later.
<<Functions related to open/close control>>

Next, the aforementioned opening/closing control means 118 will be described. The opening/closing control means 118 controls the normal electric accessory (opening/closing blade) of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 92. The opening/closing control means 118, when the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 76 to open the normal electric accessory of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A. Furthermore, the opening/closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the big winning gate (open) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the big winning gate 92 of the big winning gate device 90 .
＜＜Functions related to prior information notification＞＞

Next, the aforementioned prior information notifying means 119 will be described. The prior information notifying means 119, when a ball enters the first start winning hole 62, the 2-1 starting winning hole 63A, or the 2-2 starting winning hole 63B, displays the symbol variation corresponding to the entering ball. is withheld or not, the information related to the acquired various random values is processed to be transmitted to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) as advance notice information.

As the above-mentioned advance notification information, each winning lottery value obtained above (first winning lottery value or second winning lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), each pattern Information can be exemplified as to what kind of success or failure range, pattern range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to.

It should be noted that transmission of such advance notification information enables various prefetch effects on the sub-board 104 side. As the look-ahead effect, a pending notice, a continuous notice, and the like can be exemplified, and details of these will be described later.
<<Functions related to command transmission>>

Next, the aforementioned main command transmitting means 120 will be described. The main command transmission means 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 . The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 includes various information at various timings such as when starting winning, when special symbols start to fluctuate, when special symbols stop fluctuating, and when a big win occurs. .
<Basic functions of the sub-board>

Next, the basic functions of the aforementioned sub-board 104 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and performs various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-main board 301 has main command receiving means 141, effect pattern determining means 142, sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling speaker output and the like, and a light control means 145 for controlling game effect lamp output and the like.

The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information for designating (specifying) the display effect to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and the sound effect and light effect to be performed together with the display effect as necessary. During the variable display of the performance pattern 190, a performance suggesting a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed. Here, the "expectation" in this embodiment can be rephrased as "reliability". Below, "expectation level" refers to the production stage (normal pattern, chance up pattern, fixed pattern) that increases the expectation of a big hit due to fluctuations when it appears among the patterns of the same kind of notice production, and 1 production When confirming the winning variation pattern information (variation pattern in winning variation) and the losing variation pattern information (variation pattern in losing variation) that generate It may be used for each description of what is described, and in general, ``highly expected performance'' refers to a performance that often hits a big hit when the performance occurs.

When the effect pattern determination means 142 determines the effect pattern, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmitting means 143 . The command transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 also includes sound information and the like for reading sound data, lamp data, and the like from the ROM of the sub-sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. In the sub-sub board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, thereby forming an animation image. Then, the animation for effect is displayed on the effect display device 60 .
<Examples of specific modes related to specific games>

Next, a specific aspect of the specific game mentioned above will be described. As mentioned above, as a specific game, the probability variation function of special symbols (probability variation), the variation time reduction function of special symbols (shortening of time), and the easy entry game (probability variation function of normal symbols, variation time reduction of normal symbols function, a combination of the opening extension function of ordinary electric accessories) is provided. At least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the jackpot lottery (stop display pattern of special symbols) or the game result during the jackpot.
<<Probability variation game>>

The probability change mentioned above changes the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after the big hit so that the probability of occurrence of the big hit becomes higher than the normal probability state. In this embodiment, the duration of the variable probability state (variable probability period) is until the next big hit. In addition to this, it is also possible to determine the variable probability period based on the number of times of variation of the special symbols.

The number of fluctuations of the special symbols is determined as one time from the fluctuation display of the special symbols to the stop display. And, when the variable probability period is determined based on the number of fluctuations, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). Such a function that allows the probability variable period to end before the next big hit occurs can be called a number-cut probability variable or the like.
<<Variation time reduction game>>

The above-mentioned reduction in time generally shortens the variation time of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) on the main control display device 53 as compared with the normal game. Here, "generally shortened" does not necessarily mean that the normal game is shortened in all cases. It means that it can contain And, according to this time saving, since the fluctuation time of the special pattern is shortened, the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 62, 2-1 starting winning opening 63A, and 2-2 starting winning opening Even if a prize is won in the opening 63B), the variable display and stop display of the special symbols can be smoothly performed at short intervals, and many chances of a big win lottery can be ensured.

Furthermore, the duration of the time saving state (short time period) is determined based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols. And, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the above example, the variable probability period and the short period of time are set to the same period, but the variable probability period and the short period of time may be different periods. For example, it is possible to set the variable probability period to 104 times and the short period of time to 100 times. In addition, the probability variable period and the short period of time are not limited to being constant. For example, it is possible to set the variable probability period to any of 4 times, 25 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of the generated jackpot. In addition, it is possible to set the time period to any of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of the big win that has occurred.

Also, it is possible to provide a so-called falling lottery function. The drop lottery may be exemplified as follows. For example, after reaching a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the above-mentioned maximum number of variations (here, 100 times), the probability variation and time saving are reached for each special symbol variation until the maximum number of variations is reached, A lottery (specific game end lottery) is executed as to whether or not to end probability variation and time saving. When the specific game end lottery is won, the probability variation and time reduction are terminated, and the game state from the next variation returns to the normal state without the probability variation and time reduction.

Furthermore, it is not limited to executing both probability variation and time reduction, and it is also possible to execute only one of them in a specific game. For example, depending on the type of the hit jackpot, it is possible to give only time reduction and not give probability variation, or to give only time reduction and only probability variation.
<<Easy entry game>>

Next, the above-mentioned easy ball entry game will be described. This ball entry facilitation game is a game in which the function related to the normal electric accessory is set in favor of the player, and the opening state of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A can easily receive the game ball more than usual. state. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the control mode such as time saving related to normal symbols, probability fluctuation related to normal symbols, open extension related to normal electric accessories, and a combination of these control modes, the second The ease of entering the ball into the -1 start winning opening 63A is enhanced, and an easy-to-enter ball state is formed. In relation to this “easy ball entry game” and the above-mentioned “base”, “electric support”, etc., “high base”, “high base state”, “low base”, “low base state”, “non-electric It is possible to use terms such as "support". In the following, the "low base state" corresponds to the "non-electrical support state", and the "high base state" corresponds to the "electrical support state". In addition, the ``high base state'' includes a state of a game in which a small win is likely to occur (a small win expected game) as described later, and the ``low base state'' includes a state of not playing a small win expected game. is also possible.

Among the above-mentioned various control modes in the normal design, the time saving related to the normal design is a control mode in which the fluctuation time of the normal design is shorter than the normal state, and the probability fluctuation related to the normal design is the winning probability of the normal design. It is a control mode (probability variation related to normal symbols) that improves the normal state. Furthermore, the open extension related to the normal electric accessories is the control to open (long open) the opening time of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A longer than the opening (short open) during normal (non-specific game) It is a mode.

As described above, the ball entry facilitation game during the specific game uses three functions: time reduction of normal symbols, probability change of open lottery, and extension of opening of normal electric accessories to the 2-1 start winning opening 63A. Increase the ease of entering the ball. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to increase the ease of entering the ball into the 2-1 start winning opening 63A. Also, at least one of the three functions may be switched between a period in which it is performed and a period in which it is not performed according to the game state.

The continuation period of such easy-entering game can be determined based on the short period of time related to the special symbols. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the easy-entering game is continued during the time saving related to the special symbols, and the easy-entering game ends when the time saving related to the special symbols ends. And, in this case, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (normal pattern fluctuation pattern) in which the pattern fluctuation is started after the time saving of the special pattern is finished is provided for normal time (non-specific game time) It is possible to determine from among the fluctuation patterns.
<Main effects on pachinko machines>
<<Basic display mode of production pattern>>

Next, various effects executed by the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub-board 302 based on commands from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be mainly described. Here, first, the basic display mode of the production pattern 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) will be described.

The effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8(a)). Furthermore, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8B) as the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53 .

A stop pattern displayed along with the stop of the production pattern 190 is composed of a combination of three patterns of a left production pattern 190a, a middle production pattern 190b, and a right production pattern 190c. When the result of the jackpot lottery on the main board 102 is a jackpot, a combination of three patterns, such as "777" and "555", is used as the stop pattern representing the big win. Is displayed. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, a combination of one or all of the performance symbols different from the other performance symbols such as "767", "928", "331", etc. A symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

Here, "stop symbol" and "symbol stop" in this embodiment mean that the three production symbols 190 are "determined and stopped". That is, even if the three production patterns 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the production display device 60 while maintaining the combination of, for example, "767" and "928", the "fixed stop" is achieved by itself. It doesn't apply to what you did. The state in which the effect symbols 190 have not yet reached the "fixed stop" while maintaining the combination can be referred to as the "temporary stop" state.

As a display mode of such a "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect pattern 190 is vibrating (shaking) in small steps can be exemplified. The mode of temporary stop, in which the performance symbols 190 are shaking little by little while maintaining the combination, can be referred to as the mode of "fluctuation". As a mode of swinging of the production pattern 190 in this "temporary stop", vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotational movement, etc. can be exemplified, and the movement range can be exemplified by several millimeters.

Further, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "fixed stop", it is possible to exemplify a state in which all the performance symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination through the temporary stop state. Furthermore, at the time of this "fixed stop", it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the fixed stop has been made. As an effect indicating that the fixed display has been made, the fixed stop state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), and the fixed and stopped production patterns 190a to 190c are displayed in a state in which a special effect is added. (symbol effect), LEDs (lamps) provided in the center decoration 64, and the like can be exemplified.

Here, as the pattern effect, each of the production patterns 190a to 190c is instantaneously illuminated only for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 0.5 seconds), and the bright spots are circulated once or multiple times around each of the production patterns 190a to 190c. , enlarging or reducing the production patterns 190a to 190c, moving the production patterns 190a to 190c by several millimeters and returning them to their original positions, and the like.

In addition, in the above-described "ready-to-win" display mode, there is a case where the effect symbol that maintains the combination of the ready-to-win is displayed in the above-described "temporary stop" mode. Then, after the ready-to-win display by this "temporary stop", the symbols (in this case, medium effect pattern 190b) that have been variably displayed constitute a combination of losing (combination of losing reach) and "temporarily stop" to stop the combination. An example of an effect can be exemplified in which "fixed stop" is performed while the variable display is finished. In addition, from the state in which the three production patterns 190a to 190c are performing "temporary stop" due to the combination of the losing reach, the middle production pattern 190b resumes the fluctuation, and the reach production is highly reliable (reliability related to the big hit). The production (second half reach) such as developing into a relatively high degree can be exemplified.

It should be noted that the mode of scroll display of the effect symbols 190 is not limited to the vertical scroll described above, and various display modes can be adopted. And, as other display modes, for example, a horizontal scroll mode in the horizontal direction (right to left, etc.), and the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c are individually rotated around the vertical axis (rotated). , and a rotation mode for performing a variable display can be exemplified. Also, for example, the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c are enlarged in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back of the screen toward the front along a straight or curved (circling) trajectory. A display mode in which the images are successively drawn out can also be exemplified. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a scrolling display mode in which the effect pattern that goes from the back to the front descends from the top to the front.

Further, the scroll mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes described above. For example, when a predetermined effect is executed, a predetermined scroll mode is switched to another scroll mode. It is also possible to In addition, it is possible to vary the scroll mode for each of the plurality of presentation modes.

8(a) and 8(b) exemplify a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle of the display area 194 in the vertical direction. It has only one line. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to set the number of effective lines to 2 lines or 5 lines.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the production pattern 190 is composed of a part representing a predetermined symbol such as a number (an element pattern which is the aforementioned symbolic element production pattern) and a pattern representing a symbol other than the predetermined symbol. It is possible to configure by combining with other parts (element patterns that are non-symbolic element production patterns). Various design drawings, portraits, combinations thereof, and the like can be exemplified as the portions composed of patterns representing symbols other than predetermined symbols. It is also possible to In the example of FIG. 8(b), a heart pattern is adopted as a pattern representing symbols other than the predetermined symbol.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the above-described reduced effect symbol display area 361 is superimposed on the screen. This reduced effect pattern display area 361 displays the pattern for effect corresponding to each of the effect patterns 190a to 190b (also referred to as "mini effect pattern" or "mini pattern") in a size smaller than each of the effect patterns 190a to 190. It is something that can be shown. By displaying mini symbols in the reduced performance symbol display area 361, the situation of whether or not each of the performance symbols 190a to 190 is fluctuating, the situation at the time of stop (may include the situation at the time of temporary stop) can be displayed inconspicuously separately from each of the production patterns 190a to 190b.

In addition, by displaying the reduced performance pattern display area 361, even if the performance patterns related to the performance patterns 190a to 190b are made more transparent and invisible to the player, the performance patterns are diversified. The status of 190a-190b can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in addition to such a reduced production pattern display area 361, whether or not each production pattern 190a to 190b is fluctuating, and which of the special figures 1 and 2 is being displayed, For example, it is possible to display a pattern indicated by a small one-digit number difference in an inconspicuous manner. Such a symbol can be called a "guaranteed symbol" or the like. The display position of this guarantee pattern can be set to a position where it is not hidden even when a single or a plurality of movable production members appear in front of the production display device 60.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the guarantee pattern can be displayed at a position where it is not hidden even if any movable production member appears, or it can be changed according to the movable production member that appears.
<<Examples of Production Patterns>>

Next, the effect patterns described above will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the variation pattern determined by the main board 102 . Furthermore, in the production pattern, the mode of production including the production pattern 190 is defined. More specifically, in the production pattern, the variation process from the start of variation to the stop of variation for the selected production pattern 190, and the production process such as the background displayed in combination with the production pattern 190 and the development of the story are defined. there is And, there are production patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Among these, when the production pattern of "with reach" is executed, the production display device 60 performs the ready-to-win production in which if one more production pattern (in this case, medium production pattern 190b) is completed, a big win is achieved. Then, when the result of the winning lottery relating to the special pattern is a big win, the display of the odds such as ``777'' or ``333'' corresponding to the kind of the big win is performed by the determined and stopped performance pattern 190.例文帳に追加In addition, when the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a loss, a combination indicating a loss such as "767" or "515" is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been determined and stopped.

Furthermore, when the production pattern of "no reach" is executed, for example, like "928" or "331", the combination of the left production pattern 190a and the right production pattern 190c is not a combination of reach, It is performed by the production pattern 190 which has been determined and stopped.

These performance patterns include variations with varying lengths of time, and in particular, the "with reach" variation pattern includes a variation with a duration of several minutes. In addition, in the present embodiment, "no reach (about 3 seconds to 10 seconds)", "normal reach (10 seconds to 20 seconds degree)”, and “super reach (high hit reliability reach) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes)”. For these effect patterns, for example, one variation pattern is associated with a plurality of effect patterns, and the number of effect patterns is more diverse than the above-described variation patterns. Furthermore, "super reach" can be rephrased as "SP (special) reach".
<<Holding effect display related to special symbols>>

Next, the suspension display (suspension effect display) related to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. At the bottom of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. A second reserved number display portion 197 indicating the number of reserved winning/failed lottery values in two games is displayed. In order to simplify the description and illustration here, individual pending displays are represented by perfect circles, but the pending displays may be made using other combinations of shapes and colors, character images, animations, and the like.

In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the first hold number display section 196 described above. In addition, as the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 8A, four reservations are displayed in the first reservation number display section 196. FIG.

Further, the pending display in the first pending number display section 196 can be performed at the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first reservation number display portion 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the right end portion of the first reservation number display portion 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. A second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Furthermore, hereinafter, the suspension displays performed at the first display position to the fourth display position are referred to as "H1", "H2", "H3", and "H4", respectively.

For example, in the production display device 60, while the production pattern 190 related to the first game is being performed, and in a situation where no holding display is performed on the first holding number display unit 196, a hold occurs. Then, a hold display is performed at the first display position on the right end (position of "H1" described above). At this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and that "H2" to "H4" have not occurred. In this situation where "Hold 1" is occurring and another hold occurs, the display related to the hold that has occurred is displayed at the position of "Hold 2" to the left of "Hold 1". In a situation where "Hold 1" and "Hold 2" are displayed and "Hold 3" and "Hold 4" are not displayed, if a further hold occurs, "Hold 3" will be displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. or "Save 4" is displayed.

Then, if the variable display being executed when "Hold 1" occurs ends, and other variable start conditions related to the first game are satisfied, the above-described suspended storage information related to "Hold 1" is displayed. When the stage is reached, the pending display of “Hold 1” moves to the right side of the first pending number display section 196 . The change information display section 195 is provided on the right side of the first pending number display section 196 . The variation information display section 195 is an area for displaying information (the variation information) related to the variation display being executed at that time. In other words, the pending display of “Hold 1” moves to the variable information display section 195 and changes to the variable information display 198 when the variable display related to the corresponding pending storage information is executed.

Here, when moving the pending display of "Hold 1" to the variable information display section 195, display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the examples of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is enlarged when the pending display of “Hold 1” is changed to the variable information display 198. FIG.

As described above, when the hold display in "H1" moves to the change information display section 195, the waiting order of the subsequent hold display is moved up, and "H2" shifts to the position of "H1". Furthermore, when "H3" and "H4" exist, "H3" is shifted to the position of "H2", and "H4" is shifted to the position of "H3". In such a situation, if a further hold occurs, a new "hold 4" will occur, and the number of holds will reach the upper limit. Also, if no new hold occurs, the hold display is shifted along with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is moved up.

It should be noted that, in a broad sense, including the state of change from the pending display of "H1" to "H4" to the variable information display 198 in the variable information display unit 195, it can be regarded as a pending effect. Not limited to this, the pending display in "Holding 1" to "Holding 4" is treated as a pending display, and the state changed to the variable information display 198 in the variable information display unit 195 is not included in the pending display. is also possible.

In addition, when the variable display related to the effect pattern 190 is not performed and the number of reservations is 0, and the ball is entered in the first start winning hole 62, the display of "Hold 1" is not performed, and the variation information The change information display 198 is directly displayed on the display unit 195 . Only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the change information display 198 in the change information display section 195 is not included in the pending display. Also, when a ball enters the first start winning hole 62, the holding display of "Hold 1" is performed for a moment, and immediately after that, the change information display unit 195 is shifted to the change information display 198. is also possible.

Subsequently, the above-described second reservation number display section 197 will be described, but the description of the same points as the first reservation number display section 196 will be omitted. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second pending number display unit 197 is located on the opposite side of the first pending number display unit 196 (on the right side as viewed from the player) across the above-described variation information display unit 195. ) are arranged in a color different from that of the image of the first reservation so that the relationship of “H1” to “H4” is symmetrical.

Further, the pending display can be performed in a mode corresponding to various game states. For example, when the probability of a big hit lottery is a normal probability and when it is a high probability, it can be exemplified that, when controlled in different production modes, the states of the pending display are different from each other.

Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first pending number display unit 196, the second pending number display unit 197, and the variation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above-described ones, for example, the left side of the variation information display unit 195 or It is also possible to arrange eight pending displays on the right side and display up to four pending displays related to the first game and the second game, respectively.
<<Pending look-ahead effect related to special design>>

Next, the reserved prefetch effect, which is one of the notice effects (prefetch effects) related to the special symbols, will be described. This reserved look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the above-described reserved storage information (first special figure reserved storage information or second reserved storage information). Furthermore, the pending read-ahead effect uses the above-mentioned advance information notification function, and the reach or big hit occurs with respect to the suspension that is digested after the effect performed using the effect pattern 190 etc. at that time. It is performed as a rendition that suggests the expectation of doing.

For example, regarding the pending display that occurred at the position of "Hold 3" in the first pending number display unit 196 described above, unlike the display (for example, blue) that is the basic display mode in which pending changes are not made, green pending display By performing, it is shown that the expectation of reaching is higher than in the case of the normal blue mode. In addition to blue and green colors, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow color, and predetermined patterns are provided, and a big hit is expected in the order of yellow, red, gold, rainbow color, and predetermined pattern rather than green. There is a production that shows that the degree is high.

Here, examples of the display mode of the "predetermined pattern" include an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like. In addition, it is possible to adopt not only the colors and patterns of the reserved display, but also items other than a perfect circular shape, human images, and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a look-ahead effect by combining the various display modes described above with flashing and light emitting modes. In addition, a hold applied to a look-ahead effect including a hold look-ahead effect can be called, for example, a "trigger hold".

The look-ahead effect related to suspension as described above may also be performed in the second game. As for the second game, in addition to the basic color (orange), it is possible to provide display modes such as red, gold, rainbow colors, and predetermined patterns. In addition, items other than the perfect circular shape, human images, and the like can be used as the pending display related to the second game.

Furthermore, the above-described look-ahead effect using the pending display in the first game and the second game can be called "suspended change" or the like. Such "hold change" includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the suspension occurrence, a display mode change at a timing after the suspension occurrence, and the like. be.

Among these, those that indicate a change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold include, for example, the occurrence of the hold, the start of the hold display, the progress of the hold, and the display of the hold, for example, "Hold 2", For example, the hold display changes while proceeding to "Hold 1". For example, when a hold occurs, a hold display is performed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of "Hold 3", and when it moves to the position of "Hold 1", another color such as green is displayed. changes to .

Also, for both the first game and the second game, when the variable information display 198 is displayed, the pending display is displayed in a basic color, red, gold, rainbow color, predetermined pattern, etc., or a true display. In some cases, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be expressed by changing the display mode to an item other than a circular shape, a person image, or the like.

Furthermore, the following can be exemplified as a control mode related to the hold change as described above. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) for determining the effect pattern (hold change pattern) of the hold change is performed. A pending change pattern table is used for this pending change pattern lottery. In this pending change pattern table, the presence or absence of a pending change, and the timing when a pending change is executed (if there is a pending change) Matters relating to the determination of the effect pattern, such as what kind of display mode is to be executed, are stipulated. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are determined.

In addition, when there are a plurality of holds corresponding to the hold change among "H1" to "H4", it is possible to cancel one of the holding prefetch effects. More specifically, for example, when "Hold 4" occurs, the hold related to "Hold 4" hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any hold that has occurred earlier If it hits the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color, it can be exemplified that the hold change is canceled and not executed for the above-mentioned hold related to "Hold 4".

Furthermore, for example, when "Holding 4" occurs as in the above example, the holding related to "Holding 4" hits the holding change pattern that changes to the rainbow color, and all holdings that have occurred earlier However, if there is no change up to the rainbow color, and the change is only up to green, etc., it is possible to cancel the hold change and not execute the hold that has already occurred. It should be noted that, when the hold change is performed, it is also possible to execute an effect suggesting that the hold change will be performed (sometimes referred to as a "hold change suggestion effect"), which will be described separately later.
<<Continuous notice related to special design>>

Next, as another look-ahead effect pattern, a continuous notice (continuous effect) relating to special symbols will be described. This continuous notice includes genuine and pseudo ones, and the genuine continuous notice of these means that continuous notice production is performed over multiple variable displays related to special symbols. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means performing intermittent notice performance (pseudo continuous notice) such that the special symbols have changed a plurality of times for one time variation display related to the special symbols.

As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, a character who is the main character in the story in the production moves to different rooms sequentially aiming at the room that is the final destination for each change related to the special symbol. Examples of such things can be mentioned. In addition, as another aspect of "continuous notice", the character who is the main character fights against different enemies and wins each time the special symbol changes, aiming at the final target enemy. can also be exemplified.

Furthermore, the above-described genuine continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “continuous notice”) can be made based on advance notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 . More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received when the hold of "H3" occurs, the sub-main board 301 generates a production pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the subsequent special symbols. , a content that includes a continuous advance notice over three variable displays.

Then, when the suspension for one time is exhausted and the suspension of "Hold 3" is shifted to the position of "Hold 2", the first one of the selected production patterns according to the continuous notice An effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is sequentially digested and the hold display moves from "Hold 2" to "Hold 1", the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information display from "Hold 1" When moving to the part 195, the third and last notice is executed.

In addition, in the sub-main board 301, the variation pattern related to the variable display being executed at the time when the above-described suspension of “H3” occurs, and the “H2” or “H1” occurring before that It is also possible to confirm such pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "holding 3" is suspended, information indicating that a predetermined ready-to-win effect with a high degree of reliability of a big hit will be executed and a big hit will occur among various kinds of information already stored. If there is information indicating that the game is to be played, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the selected continuous announcement when the suspension of "H3" occurs. In addition, depending on the degree of expectation of the hold for "Hold 3", instead of immediately giving a continuous notice from the next fluctuation, wait for one fluctuation and change to "Hold 1" and look ahead. A case may be considered in which continuous notices are given across fluctuations.

In addition, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pseudo continuous notice” or “pseudo series”), in the production pattern related to one time fluctuation display of the special symbol, the reach display is multiple Examples include those that are performed intermittently, those that the characters repeat actions a plurality of times, and those that repeat temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the production pattern 190.

It should be noted that the content of the continuous notice as described above is merely an example, and various types of content other than those described can be adopted as the content of the continuous notice. In the present embodiment, stock display (symbol stock effect) relating to a predetermined effect pattern may be performed as a continuous notice that is a look-ahead effect, which will be described later.
<<Production design related to normal design>>

Next, a description will be given of the effects associated with the above-described normal symbols. In this embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform an effect related to normal symbols as part of the effect in the effect display device 60 . Then, when the effect display of the normal symbols is performed in this way, it is conceivable that the effect symbols are displayed to such an extent that, for example, the types of winning and winning can be distinguished.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, a relatively large display body and a relatively small display body (a plurality of display bodies may be provided) are provided. It is possible. A large display can be called, for example, a "main display" or a "main liquid crystal", and a small display can be called, for example, a "sub display" or a "sub liquid crystal". Furthermore, when a relatively small display body as described above is provided, the production pattern (199) relating to the normal pattern may be displayed on the small display body, for example. In addition, for example, a set of two LED indicator lamps may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device relating to normal symbols.

Further, when the performance using the performance symbols related to the normal symbols is performed, the suspension performance display related to the normal symbols can be performed as part of the performance in the performance display device 60 . Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect pending display related to the normal symbol can be replaced with, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. In addition, at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64, for example, two LED indicator lamps are provided as one set, thereby displaying the reserved number of normal symbols from "1" to "4". good too.
<<Production related to the limited frequency pattern>>

Next, an effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as "limited frequency pattern effect") will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as part of the aforementioned effect patterns. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is a effect set so as to be likely to appear in a predetermined game state in correspondence with the variation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern effect is the content of the effect that indicates a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific change during a time-saving game, a predetermined change pattern is displayed on the main board. It can be exemplified by determining and surely generating a highly reliable reach as an effect.

In addition, as a gaming situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or a no-ball hit), during a predetermined effect mode (variable probability, During the time saving game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, etc. can be exemplified. Further, in addition to these, as a gaming situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, the number of reservations related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces), or the number of reservations A case where it does not exist can also be exemplified. Furthermore, in the situation where the limited frequency pattern production is executed, a limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and the production pattern to be executed is selected from the limited frequency pattern determined in the limited frequency table. selected. In addition, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed before and after the transition from the time saving period to the non-working time saving period, which will be described later.
<<Production using operation buttons>>

Next, an effect using the operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) (hereinafter referred to as "button effect") will be described. The operation button 22 is pressed by the player when the button presentation is executed, and exhibits the function of giving the player the feeling of participating in the presentation of the game or the winning lottery. be. As a button effect, for example, during the variable display process of the effect pattern 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 is displayed with the pattern of the operation button 22, "Push", It is possible to exemplify the display of a guide prompting an operation, such as characters such as "press and hold", or a moving image of an indicator indicating the remaining time.

Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the guide display described above, a effect in which a character issues a comment, or a effect in which a friend character attacks an enemy character can be exemplified. Further, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect member is operated to notify that the ready-to-win state is reached. Further, a button performance may be performed during the ready-to-win performance, and in that case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable performance member is activated to arouse expectations for a big hit.

Further, regarding the operation button 22 described above, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally disabled, but during the button presentation, the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button operation valid period. The button operation effective period is a preset fixed time.

It should be noted that, as the operation input device such as the operation button 22, it is possible to adopt various other forms. (figure) to which a touch sensor is added can also be adopted. It is also possible to provide an operation button, an operation lever, and the like, and use them properly according to the situation such as the contents of the presentation.

Furthermore, as described above, the cross key 96 (FIG. 18(a)) is provided near the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 may be used as an enter key or the like in circumstances such as setting the environment.
<<Production when a big hit occurs>>

Next, an effect when a big hit occurs will be described. The effects when a big hit occurs include the effect at the start of the special game (jackpot start demo), the effect during the special game (round effect), the effect at the end of the final round (hit end demo), and the effect at the end of the special game. There is a performance (jackpot end demo). Here, the production of the above-mentioned jackpot start demonstration is the production of the period during which the attacker (big prize winning opening) is kept closed from the start of execution of the jackpot game (special game) to the start of execution of the first round (unit game). , and the effect of the above-mentioned jackpot end demo is the period in which the attacker (big prize opening) is kept closed from the end of the final round (unit game) to the end of the jackpot game (special game). It can be said that it is a performance.

When the performance pattern 190 described above is fixed and stopped, it is accompanied by the sound of fanfare, etc., and is displayed to the effect that a big win will start. As the display indicating that the big win is about to start, the display of the big win start demonstration screen can be exemplified. Furthermore, a right-handed guidance performance (right-handed performance) is executed as a hitting method instruction during a special game, and the player is guided to increase the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 20 to perform right-handed hitting. . In addition, as a display of guidance for right-handed hitting, a right-handed guidance display area (not shown) is displayed, and "turn the steering wheel to the right" or "right-handed hitting" is displayed in this right-handed guidance display area. It is possible to display messages such as

Here, the performance contents at the start of the big win may be different between the first win (big win at a low base) and the renzou (big win at a high base). Specifically, a display such as "Jump start!" may be displayed at the time of the first win, and a display such as "Jumps continue!" Also, regarding the guidance for hitting to the right, the message ``Turn the steering wheel to the right'' is displayed at the first hit, but in Renso, such a message is not displayed or a different display (simply ``right hitting'' is displayed. (for example, a large character is displayed for a short time). In this way, the demonstration of the start of the jackpot at the time of consecutive games may be shorter than the demonstration of the start of the jackpot at the time of the first win. Consecutive hours are shorter. Similarly, the time value of the jackpot end demonstration effect (jackpot start demonstration time) may be shorter during consecutive wins than during the first win.

As an effect during the above-mentioned special game, there is an example of a moving image that cannot be seen unless the player wins the jackpot. Also, at this time, a predetermined piece of music is output from the speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as a video during the special game, for example, a predetermined character in a graphic novel adopted for the production of the pachinko game machine 10 depicts a state of fighting with a rival enemy, or a state of enjoying luck. can be exemplified.

It should be noted that the switching of the rounds during the special game is, for example, "1R", "2R", . It is possible to notify by such a display. Furthermore, as part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of occurrences of the big wins in the case where the big wins occur during the specific game and the big wins continue.

In addition, although not shown, it is possible to display a reservation number display area that distinguishes the number of reservations of special figures 1 and 2, or to display a round number display area and a count number display area. . Further, for example, the number of consecutive games related to a plurality of jackpot games and the number of prize balls obtained during consecutive games may be displayed by displaying "probability variation 2nd time" or "number of wins: 3600". good.

Here, in the case where a part of the general winning opening (72) is arranged near the big winning opening (92), the winning ball (by entering the big winning opening (92)) by the game during the round Instead of displaying only the number of won prize balls, the number of won prize balls may also be displayed for the number of prize balls entered into the general prize opening (72). In addition, if a so-called over-winning, which is an excess winning (a ball that exceeds the specified number of counts in one round to the big winning opening) occurs, a production that suggests or notifies the occurrence (for example, Sound output such as "Good!", or display such as "Nice!" in production display) may be performed.

In addition, as an effect during the special game, it is possible to perform a specific effect (a specific effect during winning). A specific effect during the hit is displayed as an opportunity to change the story development, or is inserted as a branch point of the effect when the number of rounds is announced during the jackpot game or promotion effect to the probability change is performed. It can be used for purposes such as

Subsequently, as the effect after the special game described above, the effect related to the result of the content of the effect during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it can be exemplified that the winner expresses emotion according to the result of the fight between the characters. Such an effect after the special game can also be called, for example, "ending effect" or "result effect" related to the jackpot game.

Further, as the effect after the special game, additional display of the number of consecutive big wins, display of the number of winning balls won by the player in the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of big wins in a case where big wins occur during a specific game and the big wins continue. As for the succession of big wins, when the number of occurrences of big wins reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute a performance pattern that has not been selected before.

In addition, when the types of jackpots include jackpots that do not involve probability variation, the notification of whether or not the probability variation will occur after the end of the special game is not notified during the special game or until the end of the special game. is also possible.

For example, when a total of 10 rounds of special games are performed, the player is not given an effect to inform the player whether or not he or she has won the probability change until the end of the eighth round, and after the end of the eighth round, the probability change is performed. It is possible to employ an effect and a control mode such that, when the player wins, an effect to that effect (specific effect during winning) is performed over one or a plurality of rounds.

Similarly, in a pachinko game machine including a jackpot that does not involve probability variation, at a predetermined timing such as before the start of a special game, during a special game, or at the end of a special game, when a game ball is detected in a predetermined area It is also possible to adopt an effect and a control mode such as changing probability.

In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a game ball detection area (herein referred to as a "V ball entry device") is added to a portion below the big winning opening in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1). Alternatively, it is provided in place of the effect attacker 93. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing such as the end of a special game, the V ball entering device is set to a state where it is possible to accept a game ball, and in this state, when a game ball is detected by the V ball entering device, the probability state after that is , to be in a variable probability state over a predetermined period. Then, when the game ball does not enter the V ball entering device or when the game ball does not enter the predetermined area in the V ball entering device, control is performed so that the probability state after that does not become the variable probability state. It is conceivable that

Moreover, it is also possible to give such a probability change by entering a ball only as an effect. That is, when a jackpot lottery with variable probability is won, the V ball entry device is set to a state capable of accepting game balls at a predetermined timing. Then, a distribution mechanism is provided in the V ball entry device, and when a big hit with a variable probability is hit in advance, the game ball that has entered the V ball entry device is guided to the area of the variable probability, and the player can achieve the variable probability. Execute the production to the effect that it has been acquired. In addition, when a big hit without probability variation is hit in advance, it is conceivable to guide the game ball to a non-variability (normal) area and execute an effect to the effect that the player has won the probability variation.

In addition, when a small win occurs, no performance for notifying the occurrence of the small win is performed, and during the game after the occurrence of the small win, it is the same as the normal time, and it is impossible to distinguish whether the probability is variable. It is conceivable to perform the production of the contents.
<Various specific production examples>
<<Production by superimposing multiple production components>>

Next, various specific effects that can be implemented in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform the display of the effect display device 60, the display of the light guide plate 88 described above, and the effect by superimposing the movable effect members. This kind of performance is a composite performance by positioning a movable performance member in front of the performance display device 60 and combining the display contents of the performance display device 60 with the light decoration and movement of the movable performance member.

For example, in a state in which one of the movable production members protrudes in front of the display area 194 of the production display device 60, at least part of the display area 194 of the production display device 60 is visible outside the movable production member. For example, when an image of a blazing flame is displayed on the performance display device 60, a combination performance is executed in which the movable performance members perform optical decorations and actions in front of the flame. Furthermore, in the light guide plate 88, for example, by performing an effect such as a flashing flame pattern or a flashing ripple pattern, the distance difference between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 Visual effect can be exhibited.

Furthermore, in this state, by executing an effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 can be displayed on the light guide plate 88. It can be visually recognized by the player while being partially an obstacle. Furthermore, by synthesizing the pattern-like display changes in front and behind the movable effect member, a complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and the environment in which the movable effect member is placed can be expressed in a complicated manner. .

As a result, the limited configuration of the light guide plate 88, the movable effect member, and the effect display device 60 enables more complicated effects and diversification of effects. Even if the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display can be viewed as a part of the movable effect member behind or a part of the display contents of the effect display device 60. By making the transparent state as much as possible, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing as in the case of the light guide plate 88 .

In addition, as modes of utilization of the light guide plate 88 and transmissive liquid crystal display (herein referred to as the light guide plate 88 and the like), a mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 and the like and a mode of combination with the effect display device 60 are adopted. It is possible. The above-mentioned "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 and the like" uses most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 and the like to perform color display in which a predetermined image emerges, and the display contents of the effect display device 60 behind it are displayed. This is a display mode in which the player's consciousness is not directed as much as possible.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "mode of combination with the effect display device 60", the ratio of the area of the portion where the color development display is performed in the light guide plate 88 or the like is suppressed to a predetermined level, and the display of the effect display device 60 behind is suppressed. This is a display mode in which an effect combining the display of the light guide plate 88 and the display of the effect display device 60 is presented to the player so that the player's consciousness is directed to the content. Then, in a predetermined case, an effect is executed in the ``mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88, etc.'', and in other predetermined cases, the effect is performed in the ``mode of combination with the effect display device 60''. , and so on.
<<Production using hold display>>

Next, various effects can be exemplified as effects using the above-described hold display. For example, a pending change suggestion effect that suggests that a pending change is to be performed is illustrated, and the change information display 198 of the change information display section 195 shown in FIGS. The information display unit 195 displays character information (character state transition suggestive information) that suggests that the degree of expectation increases by changing the reserved color, such as "color change?" Then, after such state transition suggestion information is displayed, the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 may change to, for example, red, rainbow, or the like, which means a high degree of expectation. do.

It is also possible to display the above-mentioned "color change?" For example, information displays such as "no change", "color change?" Display the drum object. Then, in the variation information display unit 195, the display of "no change", "color change?", "red", and "rainbow" sequentially changes, and the subsequent variation information display 198 is performed. It is also possible to display objects such as roulette and rotating drum without erasing the variable information display 198 .

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the pending display, when the pending change is performed in the first pending number display unit 196 and the second pending number display unit 197 in FIGS. It is conceivable to proactively notify that a change has occurred or that a hold change will occur immediately, for example, by displaying hold change information such as "hold change", "red hold", "rainbow hold", etc. be done. Here, the display of such pending change information may be performed in the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or in the first pending number display section 196 or the second pending number display section 197, the pending change It may be done in the vicinity of the hold indication to be done.

As described above, one or a plurality of types of hold change suggestion effects are provided to suggest that a hold change will be performed, and the rate at which the hold change is made and the hold change are made depending on whether or not the hold change suggestion effect is executed and the type. It is also preferable that the degree of change (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red differs between type A and type B, etc.). In addition, when there are a plurality of pending indications and a pending change can be performed for a plurality of pending indications, at the start of the pending change suggesting effect, it is not known which of the pending changes will be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest from the point of view of whether the hold that has changed before will change further or whether the hold that has not changed will change.

Further, when the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the timing of the pending change can be various timings during the symbol variation. For example, if the pending change suggestion effect is to use an area or image object dedicated to the pending change suggestion, multiple starts and ends at an arbitrary timing that does not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern (production pattern) You can set the timing.

On the other hand, if the pending change suggestion effect is not dedicated to the pending change suggestion, but is performed in conjunction with the decorative pattern variation effect, for example, a pseudo decorative pattern that suggests the pending change using the display area of the decorative pattern (For example, “holding change pattern”) can be executed. In this case, it is possible to set the timing at which one or a plurality of rows of symbols are temporarily stopped and the timing at which the stop symbols are announced.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can also be changed at the start of the hold display or at the time of shift.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, main commands of various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. First, the command transmission timing is during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), at the start of special symbol pattern fluctuation, at the time of special symbol confirmation, during special symbol confirmation, at the time of the jackpot start demonstration, There are times such as when the jackpot mid-big prize opening is open, when the jackpot mid-big prize gate is closed, when the winning demo ends, and when the jackpot ending demo ends. Among them, the period during which the initial screen is displayed is the period from when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered on until the customer waiting demonstration is started and the steady state is entered. Command transmission is performed in any of the following cases: when the game starts winning, when power is restored, and when an error is detected. Furthermore, command transmission is also executed when RWM is cleared.

Among these commands, commands for clearing RWM include the commands for initialization of effect display, initialization of effect LED, and various error commands. The effect display unit initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect pattern on the effect display device 60. FIG. The effect LED initialization command turns on part of the game effect lamps when communication is normal. Various error commands are used to display effects and the like in accordance with error states.

As a command for the customer waiting demo, there is a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demo command is for setting the performance display device 60 and the game effect lamps for the customer waiting demo and for erasing the voice.

Commands at the start of special symbol pattern variation include: symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number, communication test 1, communication test 2, number of effects A to Z, effect selection state 0 to 2, variable additional information, design 1 effect There are commands for pattern, pattern 2 production pattern, pattern 1 character production, and pattern 2 character production. The symbol 1 memory number command indicates the reserved memory number of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 memory number command indicates the reserved memory number of the second special symbol. The communication check 1 command and the communication check 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. Various commands for the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effects according to the limited frequency table described above, and various commands for the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of effects according to the limited frequency table. It is. The variation additional information command adds information on the variation time (additional time) that is added to the variation pattern whose variation time is determined, and an element (effect component) that suggests, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit in the effect pattern. This indicates information for The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is. The pattern 1 character production command is for sending a command corresponding to the pattern of the first special pattern, and the pattern 2 character production command is for sending a command corresponding to the pattern of the second special pattern. be.

Commands at the time of design determination of the special symbols include a symbol 1 production pattern stop command and a symbol 2 production pattern stop command. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect pattern 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

The command during the design determination of the special pattern is the number of times of fluctuation time reduction 0 (at low probability), the number of times of fluctuation time reduction A to Z (at low probability), the number of times of fluctuation time reduction 0 (at high probability), during probability fluctuation ( up to a predetermined number of fluctuations) command. These are for transmitting commands related to the game state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time saving number display, and the like.

Commands for the jackpot start demonstration include a pattern 1 jackpot start demonstration, a pattern 2 jackpot start demonstration, and a launch position designation command. The symbol 1 jackpot start demonstration command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demonstration command are for displaying the start demonstration based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position specifying command is for notifying the launch position when the player is to separately hit the game ball by so-called left hitting or right hitting.

The commands for opening the jackpot middle/big prize opening include symbol 1 jackpot middle demos 1 to 16 and symbol 2 jackpot middle demos 1 to 16 commands. These are for displaying effects based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the number of rounds.

As a command for closing the big winning medium winning opening, there is a big winning opening closing effect command. This is for displaying the special winning slot closing effect.

Commands for the jackpot end demonstration include a one-symbol end demonstration and a two-symbol end demonstration. These are for displaying a winning end demonstration effect based on the winning symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Commands at the time of starting prize include hit notice (hit notice effect), pattern notice (hit pattern notice effect), variation notice (pattern notice effect), pattern 1 memory number, pattern 2 memory number commands. The hit notice, symbol notice, and change notice commands are commands (read-ahead commands) related to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect by the advance information notifying means 157 . The hit notice command is for transmitting the random value range of the hit/fail random number, and includes win/fail information according to the lottery probability. The symbol notice command is for transmitting the random value range of the symbol random number, and includes information regarding the type of winning. Furthermore, the fluctuation notice command is for transmitting the random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, or super reach, etc.). The symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command are for transmitting the pending memory number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, information such as the result of the lottery, the presence or absence of the look-ahead effect, the period, etc. is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of winning notice, symbol notice, and variation notice.

Commands for recovery from power failure (recovery command from power failure) include communication test 1, communication test 2, power failure recovery game states A to E, number of presentations A to Z, presentation selection states 0 to 2, symbol 1 character presentation. , Symbol 2 character production, power failure recovery hit state, power failure recovery special symbol 1 state, power failure recovery special symbol 2 state, firing position designation, error a to d, symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number command There is

The communication check 1 and communication check 2 commands are for checking whether or not normal communication is being performed. The commands for game states A to E for recovery from power failure are for transmitting different commands according to the game state at the time of power failure. Commands for the number of times of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effects according to the limited frequency table described above, and commands for the effects selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of effects according to the limited frequency table. be. The symbol 1 character effect and the symbol 2 character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure return hit state command is for transmitting different commands depending on whether the hit is in progress or not. Commands for the special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure return and the special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure return send commands according to the state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, such as waiting, fluctuating, hitting, etc. It is for The firing position designation command is for designating an appropriate firing position according to the situation, as described above. Errors a to d are for transmitting the presence and type of errors. The symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command are for transmitting the pending memory number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Major control processing of the main board>

Next, main control processing in the main board 102 of the pachinko game machine 10 having the above configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 17 and the like. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "condition device", and "accessory continuously actuating device" used below will be explained. All of these represent conceptual devices in the control process of the pachinko game machine 10, and among them, the "special electric accessory" operates (opens) the big winning gate device 90. It is. In addition, the "condition device" is activated when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the "accessory continuous operation device" is to operate the special electric accessory continuously multiple times. is possible.

In addition, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here is power-on processing shown in FIG. 15, the (win/fail) lottery determination process shown in FIG. 16, and the power-off process shown in FIG.
<Processing when power is turned on>

The power-on processing schematically shown in FIG. 12 is control processing that is started after a security check using the production code of the CPU 501 is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on. In this power-on process, an initial setting process (S101) is executed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), processes related to setting values and the like are executed. Details of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

After the initialization process (S101), it is determined (S102) whether or not the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) has been operated. In S102, if the RWM clear button has been operated (S102: YES), RWM clear processing (S103) is executed, and RWM clear information is transmitted to the sub side (sub main board 301 side). (S4). Further, information indicating that the power was turned on normally (information that the power was turned on normally) is stored in the RWM (S105), and the timer interrupt is permitted (S106). This timer interrupt permission (S106) enables game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms). Furthermore, various random numbers are updated each time the loop processing (circulation processing) is repeated (S107).

Here, the random numbers to be updated in the random number update process (S107) include various initial value random numbers per normal symbol initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special symbol per soft initial value random number. can be done. Also, in updating various random numbers, it is possible to use a 2-byte soft random number update process as a common control module. The random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the software random number described above. Depending on the type of random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107) and the hardware random number described above It is also possible to generate random numbers by the calculation of

If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not information indicating normal power-off is stored in the RWM (S111). Then, if the power-off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), the RWM is checked (S112), and it is determined whether or not the data in the RWM (the data within the predetermined range) is normal. is performed (S113). In S113, if the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES), the process proceeds to RWM clear processing (S103).

In the above S111, if the power-off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111: NO), and if the data in the RWM is normal in the above S113 (S113: NO), the power-off from the RWM Data of various information commands at the time are acquired (S116). Further, the data of the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main board 301 (S117), the return setting of the solenoid is performed (S118), and the above-mentioned S105 (processing for saving the power-on normal information in the RWM). Move to
<Initial setting processing>

Next, the initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. In this initial setting process, each port register is set (S121), and it is determined whether or not a setting key has been inserted (S122). If a setting key has been inserted (S22: YES), setting value change processing (S126) is performed, and this setting value change processing (S126) will be described later.

If the setting key is not inserted in S122 (S122: NO), setting value information is read (S123), and it is determined whether or not the setting value is abnormal (S124). . If the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is finished, but if the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), the set value abnormality is notified (S128). Then, the setting value abnormality information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S129), after which a loop state is established.
<Set value change processing>

Next, the aforementioned set value change processing (S126 in FIG. 13) will be described with reference to FIG. In this set value change process, the RWM in the set value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether or not the set value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been input (S133). A set value corresponding to the information is displayed (S134).

If there is an abnormality in the setting value information at S132 (S132: YES), the setting value is forcedly set, and the default value (here, "1") is set to the setting value information (S141). Then, after transmitting set value forced setting information to the sub-main board 301 (S142), the set values are displayed (S133).

After S134, it is determined whether or not there is an operation to change the setting value (S135). If there is an operation to change the setting value (S135: YES), the setting value information at that time is incremented by one (S136). Further, it is determined whether or not the setting value information has reached the setting upper limit value ("6" in this case) (S137). 1” (S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed (whether or not the setting key has been removed) (S139). ), and the set value change process ends.

In the above S135, if there is no change setting (S135: NO), without performing the process of adding the setting value information (S136) to the process of setting the lower limit value (here, "1") (S138) , the process proceeds to determination processing (S139) for determining whether or not the setting change is completed. If the set value information has not reached the upper limit value in S137 (S137: NO), it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed without performing the process of setting the lower limit value in S137 (S138). to the determination process (S139). Further, if the setting change is not completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the setting value display process of S134.

At S133, if there is no input from the RWM clear switch (S133: NO), a set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed (S146), as in S134. Furthermore, as in S139 above, it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed (whether or not the setting key has been removed) (S147). The display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased at S140), and the set value change process is terminated. If the setting change is not completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to S136 for setting value display.

That is, in the above S133, when there is an input of the RWM clear switch (S133: YES), the setting value is displayed (S134), and the processing for changing the setting value (S135 to S138, etc.) is performed. It becomes possible. However, in the above S133, if there is no RWM clear switch input (S133: NO), the setting values are displayed (S146), but the processing for changing the setting values as in S135 to S138 is performed. setting value display is performed (this state is sometimes referred to as a setting display mode or a setting confirmation mode).
<Game Progress Interrupt Processing>

Next, the game progress interrupt processing (FIG. 15) which is repeated for each timer interrupt of a predetermined cycle will be described. This game progress interrupt processing (also referred to as "timer interrupt processing") is omitted in the above description, but based on the cycle information set in the power-on processing (FIG. 12) repeated. As shown in FIG. 15, in the game progress interrupt process, setting of interrupt operation conditions (S41, S42), recursion of the interrupt process time monitoring means (S43), management of the gaming machine (S45 to S70), permission of interrupt ( S71) is performed in order to return to the process before the game progress interrupt occurred.

Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting processing (S41, S42), the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41) in order to clear the interrupt flag, and the interrupt operation condition setting is performed. A value is set in a control register corresponding to a predetermined input terminal (S42). After that, the second recursive information is set (S43), and the second recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursive information, along with the previously set first recursive information, serves as a condition for recursively restarting the monitoring timing of the interrupt processing time monitoring means.

In the game machine management (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order to manage the game machine. First, input processing (S45) is executed to monitor the input of a specific signal. The objects to be monitored here are various switches attached to the game board surface, saucer full switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass non-detection signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal is.

Subsequently, various random number update processing (S46) is executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, an initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. Also, in order to update the 2-byte timer, timer subtraction processing (S49) is executed, and in order to set the validity period of the 2-1 start winning prize opening 63A, the validity period setting process (S50) of the second start opening is executed. Run.

Further, a winning monitoring process (S51) is executed to store the number of payouts of prize balls, create an output request for board external information, and request transmission of a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 104. FIG. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate (operation port 68), normal symbol operation gate monitoring processing (S53) is executed in order to memorize the random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol is displayed. A normal symbol control process (S54) is executed in order to perform the process related to the electric accessory. Furthermore, in order to monitor the start of normal symbol fluctuation, a normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. In addition, in order to monitor the winning of the game ball first start winning opening 62, 2-1 starting winning opening 63A, and 2-2 starting winning opening 63B, start opening monitoring control processing (S56) is executed. , In order to perform processing related to the first special symbol display section 70 or the second special symbol display section 71, a special symbol control process (S57) is executed. Subsequently, a special electric role product control process (S58) is executed in order to perform processing related to the special electric role product, and a large winning prize opening validity period setting process (S59) is performed in order to perform processing relating to the validity period of the special prize opening. , and a special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) is performed to monitor the start of variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, abnormality detection processing (S61) is executed in order to monitor magnetism, disconnection/short circuit/power supply, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set/game board frame open/close status, and double glass monitoring. Then, in order to detect an entering ball passing time abnormality, an entering ball passing time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Furthermore, in order to display the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error state, the number of operation pending balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol display device, the game state display processing (S63 ) is executed, and the handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20 (including the state of the amount of operation). In addition, special symbol display, normal symbol display, special symbol display device (70, 71) operation pending ball number display, normal symbol display device operational pending ball number display, game state display, special electric accessories LED output processing (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times the has operated continuously and to display an error.

Subsequently, a shooting control signal output process (S66) is executed to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the shooting of game balls, and a test signal output process (S67) is performed to create and output a signal to be output to the test device. to run. Furthermore, in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid and the large winning opening (open) solenoid, solenoid output processing (S68) is executed, and in order to transmit the effect control command, the effect control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and external information output processing (S70) is executed in order to output signals to external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

Thereafter, interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process exits to return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interruption is executed, the above-mentioned cyclic processing (repeated cyclic processing including the random number update processing of S7) of the power-on processing (FIG. 12) is executed. .
<<Handle state signal inspection processing>>

In the handle state signal inspection process (S64) described above, the handle state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is a change in the handle state, the handle state monitoring timer is activated. is subtracted, the steering wheel status is updated, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set, and a command transmission request for the steering wheel status effect is performed. If it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel status as a result of the inspection, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set. When it is determined that the steering wheel timer is being decremented during the subtraction of the steering wheel state monitoring timer, the subsequent processing relating to the steering wheel state is not performed.
<Lottery determination process>

Next, the aforementioned lottery determination processing (also referred to as “lottery determination processing”) will be described. This lottery judging process is a process of judging whether or not a win is made using probability data (a process of judging a big hit lottery). Further, the lottery determination process can be performed, for example, in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) in the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 15).

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of lottery determination processing relating to winning or not. In this lottery determination process, first, when proceeding to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, C register) as winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. After proceeding to step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the repetition count data, and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a big win and "2" indicates a small win.

After proceeding to step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 designates the address of the probability data corresponding to the game state (variable probability state or normal probability state) and the set value, and obtains the probability data corresponding to the designated address from the lottery table. and store it in a register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

After proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 501 performs a win/fail decision. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores the random number value for winning/failure determination acquired when winning the starting gate in the comparison register (for example, DE register) for the lottery, and then acquires it in step S1025. The value stored in the obtained probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register to obtain a new value of the comparison register. Thus, the value of the compare register is updated.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the prize has been won. Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), if the value of the DE register becomes smaller than "0" (when a carry occurs), "1" is set to the carry flag of the flag register. set. That is, the carry flag is set. Also, "a carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1". Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not a win is made by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to "1".

Here, when the carry flag is not set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the lottery has not been won (S1027: NO), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the lottery has been won (S1027: YES), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set when "YES" is determined in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by lottery determination (for example, winning number 1 is a big win, winning number 2 is a small win). It will happen.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds "1" to the value of the winning number data (eg, C register) to make it a new value of the winning number data (eg, C register). That is, the value of winning number data (for example, C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.

After proceeding to step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repeat count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts "1" from the value of the repetition count data (eg, B register) to obtain a new repetition count data (eg, B register). That is, the value of the repetition count data (eg, B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1030.

After proceeding to step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is "0". Here, when the value of the repetition count data (eg, B register) is "0", it indicates that the repetition count has ended, and the repetition count data (eg, B register) is not "0" ("0"). greater) indicates that the number of iterations has not expired. Then, in step S1030, main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the number of repetitions data (for example, B register) is "0".

Here, when the value of the B register is "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (S1030: YES), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (S1030: NO), and returns to step S1025.

Also, when "NO" in step S1030, the same probability data as the previous time is used to perform the determination of whether or not step S1026 is successful again. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) to "00(H)", which is non-winning data, and terminates the processing according to this flowchart.

With the above configuration, as described in step S1028, the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, so there is no need to store the winning number data in the lottery table. In addition, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, the same probability data need not be set repeatedly in the lottery table, so the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In this example, one winning number corresponding to each of the small win and the big win is provided, and at the time of winning, the type of the big win or the small win is determined by the pattern random number obtained separately, but these types can be determined by this processing. is also possible. In that case, if the value of the repeat count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types and the probability data for each winning number (range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine can be used. is also possible.
<Power off processing>

Next, a description will be given of power-off processing that is executed when a power-off occurs. As shown in FIG. 17, in the power-off process, the data of all used registers are saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt permission/prohibition state before power-off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83), and if it is not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84), The process proceeds to RWM access prohibition processing (S88). On the other hand, if it is saved (S83: YES), save the value of the stack pointer in the stack pointer buffer (S85), save the power failure normal information in the RWM (S86), and calculate the RWM checksum. and save the checksum data (S87). Then, access to the RWM is prohibited (S88), and the reset of the CPU 501 is waited while the control processing is looped.

In this power-off process, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information are The information is set, the time for monitoring by the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the time is recurred. Further, in this embodiment, the forced setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power interruption process and before the process of saving all used registers (S81). It is Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started in a state in which the monitoring timekeeping is restarted. In other words, by forcibly recursing the monitoring time when a power failure occurs, in the control processing immediately after the power supply is restarted, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without recurring the monitoring time. It's becoming
<Other Individual Control Processing Aspects>
<<Control mode related to command transmission timing>>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is once stored in the command buffer by command request before transmission. Command buffer is a function of a plurality of buffers as a ring buffer, in the control processing for command transmission (here effect control command transmission processing (S69)), in the order accumulated in the command buffer, once In the game progress interrupt process, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. It is also possible to employ a technique in which commands with higher priority are transmitted first. Also, in various control processes, when a command requiring transmission occurs, it is also possible to perform command transmission at any time. When such a method is adopted, during one game progress interruption process, for example, production command transmission is performed collectively within one control processing module, such as production control command transmission processing (S69). Instead, command transmission is sequentially performed within each control processing module each time a command transmission is required. Therefore, it is difficult for the command transmission to be carried over to the next game progress interrupt process. And, for example, there is no delay in the transmission of commands at the time of start winning or command transmission at the start of fluctuation of special symbols, and prompt command processing becomes possible.
<<Control mode related to update of pending storage>>

In this embodiment, as described above, a configuration is adopted in which priority is not provided between the first game and the second game, and the reserved memory is consumed in the order in which the starting winnings have occurred. Then, by updating the pending storage information according to the consumption, updating the total pending number of a plurality of games, and storing the winning order, the pending stored information is updated as a whole. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to employ a configuration that prioritizes the first game or a configuration that prioritizes the second game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to notify the sub-main board 301 that the reserved memory has been updated, a request for the symbol storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is made as described above. By including both the pattern 1 memory number command and the pattern 2 memory number command in one command, the required program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<<Control mode related to lottery of fluctuation pattern>>

Next, various aspects related to the lottery of variation patterns will be described. In one pachinko game machine 10, one of the modes of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied, or may be used in combination as appropriate. Then, when a plurality of aspects are used together, it is possible to selectively use the aspects based on factors such as win/fail results, for example.

In the present embodiment, the determination of the variation pattern includes, as described above, the success/fail result, the number of balls on hold, the special symbol (may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol). Although used as elements, a variation pattern table corresponding to a combination of these determinant elements is selected. Then, along with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time paired with the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern random number. Furthermore, in this embodiment, regarding the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made different depending on whether the result of the lottery is a big win or a loss. That is, in the case of a big hit, based on status information of special symbols such as the number of held balls, special symbols (group), and win/fail random numbers, a variation pattern table is selected from among those linked. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variation pattern table is selected from those linked based on the game state, special symbols, number of retained balls, and hit/fail random number. Of these, in the case of a big hit, regarding the variation pattern in which the re-lottery time is given in the production, the re-lottery time is given based on the production state (presence or absence of a specific production, etc.) and the special pattern group. The presence or absence is determined, and the determination result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 .

Further, when determining the variation pattern and the variation time, it is possible to determine additional variation information according to the determined variation pattern number, and subsequently determine the variation time based on the additional variation information. For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern presentation, it is conceivable to determine the extension of the variation time accordingly.

Further, as described above, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the time of starting the symbol variation of the special symbol, the sub-main board 301 can perform the variation previously determined in relation to the elements such as the game state and the winning symbol. An effect of adding additional time to the time can be performed later. Then, in such a manner, when determining the fluctuation time of the overall effect pattern, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance as follows. is. That is, considering the case of performing the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-run"), if the variation pattern of the pseudo-run is simply set individually, the same number of variation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. need to leave In addition, in the case where the effect patterns such as the effect symbols on the sub-main board 301 are prepared for the variation patterns that are all individually determined by the main board 102, the total number of variation patterns on the main board 102 is large. As a result, it is conceivable that the number may exceed 256, for example. For this reason, in order to provide a code that can be identified with respect to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it becomes necessary to increase the number of bits and bytes for representing the code as compared with the conventional case.

However, by using variable additional information (variable additional pattern), it is possible to form a variable pattern after the fact by connecting, for example, random number lottery variable additional information to a relatively small number of basic variable patterns. is. As a result, new variation patterns can be formed by combining variation patterns, so that various variation patterns can be created without excessively increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. It should be noted that the random number value related to the variable additional information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 as a command for the look-ahead effect at the time of start winning. Also, it is possible to set the appearance probability of the variable additional pattern so that the variable additional information is easily added when the limited frequency pattern presentation is executed. Further, if an example of using the variable additional information is given, when "777", which is a probability variable design, is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the production design 190, the setting of the variable additional information is not performed, and the combination of the production design 190 is , Once the non-variable pattern "666" is displayed, the effect until the result of whether or not to be promoted to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of shaking fluctuation and the development of the fluctuation mode ) may be performed by setting variable additional information.

Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined based on the number of held balls, and the variation pattern table to be referred to differs depending on the number of held balls. The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of held balls 0-4. The reason why the variation pattern table corresponding to the suspension 4 is provided in addition to the four suspensions 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from a situation where the number of pending balls is four, and the number of pending balls is three. A state in which the number of pending balls is 3 at a stage during the game progress interruption process being executed at that point in time, where the control process has not yet reached the stage of determining the variation pattern, which is the process during the subsequent game progress interruption process. When a new starting prize is generated from , the number of pending balls is added to become 4 at the time of determining the variation pattern. Therefore, a variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of held balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can be used as an element for determining the variation pattern.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of held balls 0-3. In this case, in terms of control processing, it is possible to have a configuration in which the starting winnings from the state of the number of reserved balls of 3 to the determination of the variation pattern are not added. In addition, any aspect can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines of the type in which the maximum number of reservations other than four (for example, 8) is set.

Further, the acquisition timing of the variation pattern random number can be the timing of the variation pattern lottery. That is, since the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of special electric accessories, etc., as an element for performing a proper game, compared to the win or fail random number, for example, in aiming for a fair game Less need for constraints. Therefore, it is conceivable to acquire and store the variation pattern random number at the time of the variation pattern lottery as a separately provided timing, instead of daring to acquire the variation pattern random number at the start winning prize. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of information to be stored at the time of start-up winning, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of programs and memory.

In this embodiment, the variation additional information related to the pseudo-run is determined, and the pseudo-run production is performed by adding the variation time of the variation additional information to the variation time related to the basic variation pattern. There is Furthermore, the variable additional information related to the pseudo-run may be diverted in cases other than when the pseudo-run effect is performed, but the effect control using this variable additional information will be described later.
<<Control mode related to design designation>>

In the lottery of symbols, the design determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the symbol indicating the random number, and then the design is determined from the determined design determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the random design number. is also possible. If the numerical range of the symbol random numbers is set to "0 to 999", the binary code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the memory and program capacity can be reduced. In addition, the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of times of time saving are distributed to the winning patterns (may be a group of patterns), and according to the winning patterns, the number of subsequent rounds, the number of times of time saving, and the opening time of the big prize opening , an open pattern, or the like may be determined. By doing so, there is no need to store data unique to the game state or perform control processing, and the memory and program capacities can be reduced. Furthermore, information (game state designation information) that conveys a game state (game state designation information) is added to a command (for example, in the present embodiment, each command of a pattern 1 effect pattern and a pattern 2 effect pattern) that transmits a winning pattern or the like from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. ) can also be added. This command is not sent to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created, temporarily stored, and sent to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<<Relationship between special design and production design fluctuation time>>

As described above, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the corresponding effect symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop varying in synchronization with each other. Depending on the situation, the fluctuation time of the production design 190 can be shortened to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special design (first special design or second special design).

That is, when the variation of the special symbols and the variation pattern are determined, and when the variation of the special symbols is started, the main board 102 transmits a command for starting the variation of the performance symbols (command at the time of starting the variation) to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required to send and receive a predetermined command (for example, the first command at the start of fluctuation), and the waiting time set in a command buffer (a ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) It is conceivable that the start of fluctuation of the production design is delayed from the start of fluctuation of the special design by the influence of the time until all commands (pre-insertion commands) are sent out. Furthermore, at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, a fluctuation stop command (command at the time of fixing the special symbols) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301. ) and the congestion of the command buffer (the number of commands waiting for transmission), it is conceivable that the stop of fluctuation of the performance symbols may be delayed.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the production pattern is set to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special pattern based on the command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, and by performing the swing fluctuation, the special pattern starts the next fluctuation. This is to avoid a situation in which the last pattern is stopped and displayed later. Due to the delay in processing due to the number of commands, there is a risk that the display during fluctuations will extend over to the next fluctuation. is suppressed, and the production design can be almost certainly fixed during the display fixing time of the special design.
<<Preliminary judgment of lottery results>>

First, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , although not shown, can be divided into a plurality of random value ranges (for example, A to N).

For example, the hit/fail random value range is “0 to 65535”, “0 to 205” belongs to the prefetch code A category, “206” belongs to the prefetch code B category, and the hit/fail random value range is “207” to “210”. ” belong to the classification of look-ahead codes C to F, respectively.

Then, regardless of the set value, the look-ahead code A is assumed to be a hit (jackpot) in all settings, and the look-ahead code B is set to "2" or more, even in normal times. It is possible to say that even if there is, it will be a hit. In this case, if the read-ahead code B is equal to or greater than the set value "2", it indicates a hit regardless of the normal probability or the high probability, but if the set value is "1", it indicates a loss. In addition, it is possible to set the prefetch codes C to F to be successful in both normal and high-probability situations, regardless of the probability state, if the set value is "3" or more to "6". is.

Using the pre-reading codes classified and grouped in this way, the main board 102, for example, determines the pre-reading code to which the acquired random number value belongs, and sends information (command) corresponding to the determined pre-reading code to the above-mentioned advance notification information. , can be transmitted to the sub-main board 301 . Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a win notice effect as a look-ahead effect in relation to the win/fail determination result without waiting for the suspension to be completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the prior determination of the type of special symbol and the prior determination of the type of variation pattern related to the special symbol are performed based on the random number range as in the case of the result of the winning lottery described above. It is supposed to be done. In addition, the types of special symbols and the types of variation patterns related to the special symbols are provided more than the types of the results of the lottery, and the number of pre-reading codes (number of groups) is also larger than in the case of the lottery. It's becoming However, as a method of prior judgment based on the random number range, although the random number range and the type of lottery results to be grouped are different, it is possible to perform the same preliminary judgment related to the winning/failing judgment as described above. . Therefore, here, a detailed description of the advance determination based on the random number range for the symbol announcement effect and the pattern announcement effect will be omitted.

By performing preliminary determination based on such a random value range, information can be rounded, and a command related to preliminary determination can be created with a small amount of information. That is, if the number of random numbers exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random numbers exceeds 1 byte. For this reason, if the random number information is transmitted as it is (as raw information) to the sub-main board 301 for preliminary determination, information for identifying which random number has been transmitted is transmitted in MODE, and the random number is transmitted. A 2-byte command (MODE, EVENT), which is stored in EVENT and transmitted, may have to be transmitted twice in order to notify the random value.

However, as in this embodiment, by converting the acquired random number value into information indicating the range to which it belongs and transmitting it to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced more than the number of random number values, and the random number value can be reduced. Even if the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (one byte), it is possible to command the attribute of the acquired random number with the amount of information of one byte. On the side of the main substrate 102, in preparation for a situation in which it is not desired to transmit the prefetch information, a code indicating that fact (for example, that it is indeterminate or undetermined) is provided. It is also possible to transmit the command to indicate to the sub-main board 301 side.
<Game characteristics that utilize small hits>

The basic matters related to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment have been described so far, and next, the game property utilizing the above-described small win will be described. First, FIGS. 19 and 20 schematically show game states that can be shifted from a state before a big win to a game state after a big win (so-called first win). Furthermore, among these, in FIG. 19, the winning probability is low for both special symbols and normal symbols. It shows the state transition when it occurs (basic case). On the other hand, FIG. 20 similarly shows a state transition in a special case (irregular case) in which a special figure 2 jackpot occurs from a normal state.

In the following description, the types of possible jackpots are classified into a first bonus, a second bonus, and a third bonus. Furthermore, the game after the jackpot game is classified into a first rush (first RUSH), a second rush (second RUSH), and a third rush (third RUSH). The jackpot games associated with the first bonus, the second bonus, and the third bonus can be called "first jackpot game," "second jackpot game," and "third jackpot game."

Further, the effects executed in each of these jackpot games can be respectively referred to as "first jackpot game action", "second jackpot game action", and "third jackpot game action". In addition, the respective effects for the first rush (first RUSH), second rush (second RUSH), and third rush (third RUSH) are referred to as "first RUSH effect", "second RUSH effect", and "third RUSH effect". be able to.

Here, first, an overview of various jackpots will be described, and then transition of the game state including the game after the jackpot game will be described. Among the above-mentioned various bonuses, as a bonus related to special figure 1, as shown by providing a "special figure 1" block on the left side of FIG. 19, "first bonus" and "second bonus" is provided. Among these, the "first bonus" of special figure 1 is a big hit of 16R probability variation.

On the other hand, in the "second bonus" according to special figure 1, the "second bonus" block is provided in the "right-handed" block in the left part of FIG. 19 and the part near the center right in FIG. So, 6R probability variable jackpot and 6R normal jackpot are provided. In this embodiment, the success/fail determination table (FIG. 9(a)) is configured so that a small hit does not occur for the special figure 1, but a small hit may occur for the special figure 1 as well. . And, in this case, it is conceivable to make the occurrence rate of the small hit related to the special figure 1 extremely smaller than the small hit related to the special figure 2.

Subsequently, with regard to the special figure 2, as shown by providing a "special figure 2" block in the "right-handed" block in the part on the right side of the center in FIG. 19, "first bonus", "third bonus" , and a "bump" is provided. Among these, the "first bonus" of special figure 2 is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and when the jackpot game ends, a small hit rush (small hit RUSH) that can occur in a concentrated manner as described later. It is to shift to the game state of. In addition, in the example of FIG. 19, the "first bonus", "third bonus", and "striking" according to the special figure 2 are transferred through the battle production during fluctuation in the first RUSH described later. there is Then, the "first bonus" and "third bonus" shift when there is a winning effect in the changing battle effect in the first RUSH, and the "impact" is defeated in the changing battle effect in the first RUSH. It is designed to shift when there is a production of.

Further, the small hit in this embodiment is generated only for the special figure 2, as illustrated in FIG. 9(a). Furthermore, the occurrence probability (expected value) of a small hit is determined to be considerably high, and in the example of FIG. 9(a), the occurrence probability (expected value) of a small win is 1/1.02. ing. For this reason, the player can obtain a small hit relatively easily by aiming for the starting prize of the special figure 2. - 特許庁Here, the occurrence probability (expected value) of the small win is much higher than any occurrence probability of the big win (FIG. 9(a)) at the time of high probability.

In addition, in the normal case that is not the period of the small hit rush (small hit RUSH) mentioned above, the fluctuation time of the special pattern (and the effect pattern) due to the start winning of the special figure 2 is from several seconds to about 10 minutes at the longest. It is a long one. However, the fluctuation pattern selected by the start winning of the special figure 2 during the small hit rush (small hit RUSH) is less than 1 second. Therefore, coupled with the high probability of occurrence of small wins, it is possible to continuously and intensively generate small wins after the big win game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a small hit is made, 1R is opened, and the opening time of the big winning opening 92 is a short time (for example, about 1.8 seconds) in which about one game ball can enter. etc.). Since 15 balls are paid out with one ball entering the big winning hole 92, the number of balls that the player can get with one small win is the 2-1 starting winning hole. It is larger than the number of prize balls obtained by one ball entering 63A (here, one ball).

The "third bonus" of the special figure 2 described above is a 6R probability variable jackpot, and as described above, it shifts through the production of winning the battle during the fluctuation of the first RUSH. And, it differs from the above-mentioned "first bonus" in that it does not involve a small hit RUSH. In addition, the special figure 2 "hitting" is a 2R normal jackpot, and as described above, it is intended to shift through the production of the content of losing the battle during the fluctuation of the first RUSH.

Subsequently, the transition of the game state including the game (various rush states) after the jackpot game will be described. First, in the basic case shown in FIG. 19, in the normal state shown on the left end of the figure, the winning probability related to the special symbol is low probability ("special symbol low" state), and the winning probability related to the normal symbol. is also a low probability (“normal figure low” state). In this normal time, when a big win occurs as indicated by a "big win" block in the drawing, the type of the big win at that time is the "first bonus" or "second bonus" according to the special figure 1. - 特許庁

Then, as shown by enclosing the "special figure 1" block with the "right-handed" block, right-handed hitting is performed, and the game ball is shot aiming at the operation opening 68. - 特許庁When the game ball passes through the operation opening 68, a state in which a big hit game is possible as described above is brought about. Then, the hitting to the right is continued, and the jackpot game related to the jackpot that has occurred is performed.

When the "first bonus" related to the special figure 1 occurs, after the big hit game is over, it shifts to the second RUSH (small hit RUSH) which is latent probability change. In addition, the second RUSH, which is a latent probability change, will be described later.

When the "second bonus" related to special figure 1 occurs, there is a case where it shifts to the first RUSH shown in the center left part in the figure, and a case where it shifts to the 3rd RUSH shown in the lower right side in the figure. Then, when the 6R variable "second bonus" occurs, the game shifts to the first RUSH, and when the 6R normal "second bonus" occurs, the game shifts to the 3rd RUSH. Also, when shifting to the 1st RUSH, as indicated by the "win" block, a battle victory effect is executed as an effect during the jackpot game. Furthermore, when shifting to the 3rd RUSH, as indicated by the "loss" block, a battle defeat effect is executed as an effect during the jackpot game.

Among these, the first RUSH is a game state in which a game is played by hitting to the right. Furthermore, in the 1st RUSH, both special figures and normal figures have a high probability, and an electric sapo is given. And the period of the electric sapo is until the next big hit occurs.

During the first RUSH, right-handed hitting is performed as described above, and the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A and the 2-2 starting winning opening 63B according to the special figure 2 are aimed. For this reason, the jackpot that occurs during the first RUSH is, in principle, the bonuses related to special figure 2, "first bonus (battle victory)", "third bonus (battle victory)", and "striking (battle defeat)". )”.

When the generated jackpot is the ``first bonus (battle victory)'' among these, when the jackpot game of 16R is over, as shown in the upper right part of the figure, the above-described second RUSH is started. This second RUSH corresponds to the aforementioned small hit RUSH. Furthermore, the second RUSH is a game state in which the game is shifted to the right only when the first bonus related to the special figure 2 is generated. In the second RUSH, the special figure has a high probability and the normal figure has a low probability. And in the second RUSH, no electric sapo is given. Also, the second RUSH continues until a big hit occurs. In addition, the detail of the game control which concerns on small hit RUSH is mentioned later. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the relationship between the first bonus and the second RUSH is such that after the first bonus, the second RUSH always shifts to the second RUSH, and the second RUSH shifts only when the first bonus occurs. , is not limited to this, and can be changed as necessary.

Subsequently, when the jackpot generated for the special figure 2 is the "third bonus (battle victory)", when the 6R jackpot game is over, as shown in the middle right side of the figure, it shifts to the first RUSH. . This first RUSH is a game state performed by hitting to the right. Also, in the first RUSH, the special figure has a high probability, and the normal figure has a high probability. Furthermore, in the first RUSH, electric support is given until the next big hit.

Furthermore, when the jackpot generated for the special figure 2 is ``striking (battle defeat)'', when the 2R jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the 3rd RUSH as shown in the lower right part of the drawing. This 3rd RUSH is a game state performed by hitting to the right. Also, in the 3rd RUSH, the special figure has a low probability, and the normal figure has a high probability. Furthermore, in the 3rd RUSH, time saving and electric support over 100 fluctuation periods are given. Then, when the third RUSH ends without any hits occurring, the state shifts to the normal state as indicated by the "Electrical sapo omission" block in the figure.

Next, the state transition in the irregular case shown in FIG. 20 will be described. In this irregular case, a bonus related to special figure 2 is generated from normal time. As a bonus related to this special figure 2, as shown by providing a "special figure 2" block on the left side of FIG. 20, "first bonus (battle victory)", "third bonus (battle victory)" , and “striking (battle defeat)” are provided. Since these jackpots are the same as those shown in the central right portion of FIG. 19, description thereof is omitted here. Further, from these big hits, the game moves to the second RUSH, the first RUSH, and the third RUSH, but these are also the same as those shown on the right side of FIG. 19, so the description is omitted.

Regarding this irregular case, it is assumed that the "second bonus" or "first bonus" according to the special figure 1 described above occurs in the above-described second RUSH or first RUSH. Of these, if the "second bonus" is a 6R probability variation, it will shift to the first RUSH as shown on the right side of the figure through the production of battle victory during the big hit game. In addition, if it is 6R normal, after the effect of battle defeat during the big hit game, it shifts to the 3rd RUSH as shown in the lower part of the center right side in the figure. Further, when the first bonus is generated, although not shown, the game is shifted to the second RUSH, which is the above-mentioned small winning RUSH.

21(a) and (b) show an example of the ratio (expected value) of the big hits in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. FIG. FIG. 21(a) exemplifies the jackpot percentage in the normal game state (without electric sapo), and FIG. 21(b) exemplifies the jackpot percentage when there is an electric sapo. Among them, in the example of FIG. 21(a), the second bonus (6R) and the first bonus (16R) are provided as the big hits related to the special figure 1. FIG.

The second bonus, which is a 6R big hit, is provided with two types of "win 1" and "win 2" as high probability hits (high certainty), and these second bonuses are time-saving. The period is until the next big hit. Here, "Victory 2" out of "Victory 1" and "Victory 2" is such that the player loses in the battle performance during the jackpot game and is promoted (reversal victory) in the demo at the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, "Victory 1" can be set not to include an effect of losing in battle. In addition, one type of "defeat" is provided as a low probability hit (low certainty), and the short period of time related to the second bonus of this "defeat" is until the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times. ing.

Furthermore, the first bonus (battle victory), which is a 16R big hit, is provided with one type of high-probability hit (high probability), and this first bonus is not provided with time saving. The total ratio of the two types of second bonuses (win 1 and win 2) and the first bonus, which have high probability, is 65%. On the other hand, the ratio of the second bonus, which has a low probability, is 35%.

On the other hand, as a big hit related to special figure 2, the first bonus with a high probability (battle victory, 16R), the third bonus with a similarly high probability (battle victory, 6R), and the low probability of a hit (battle Defeat, 2R) is provided. Of these, the first bonus, which is a 16R probability variation, is not given a time reduction. Furthermore, the short time period in the 3rd bonus, which is a 6R variable, is until the next big hit. In addition, the time-saving period related to the hit with a low probability is until the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times. The ratios of the first bonus, the third bonus, and the hit are 40%, 25%, and 35%, respectively.

Subsequently, in the example when there is an electric sapo shown in FIG. is provided. Among these, the short time period related to the second bonus (win 1) is until the next big hit. Moreover, the time saving period related to the second bonus (defeat) is until the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times. The percentages of the second bonus (win 1) and the second bonus (defeat) are 65% and 35%, respectively.

On the other hand, as a big hit related to special figure 2, the first bonus with a high probability (battle victory, 16R), the third bonus with a similarly high probability (battle victory, 6R), and the low probability of a hit (battle Defeat, 2R) is provided. Of these, the first bonus, which is a 16R probability variation, is not given a time reduction. Furthermore, the short time period in the 3rd bonus, which is a 6R variable, is until the next big hit. In addition, the time-saving period related to the hit with a low probability is until the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times. The ratios of the first bonus, the third bonus, and the hit are 40%, 25%, and 35%, respectively.

As described above, after various big hits, the game state shifts to the 1st RUSH or 3rd RUSH where the electric sapo is performed, or the small hit RUSH (second RUSH) game state without the electric sapo being performed. In general, the period of the electric sapo is generally determined using the number of fluctuations, such as 100 times or 50 times, and is likely to be prolonged unless a big hit occurs. This point also applies to this embodiment. However, unlike the electric sapo, the small hit is different from the concept of the duration, and whether or not it is executed (whether or not) is determined by a lottery for each fluctuation. Also, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls (here, 15) that can be obtained by one small hit is the prize obtained by entering one ball into the 2-1 start winning port 63A having an electric support function. It is larger than the number of balls (here, one). And, in this embodiment, as described above, a relatively large percentage (for example, about 90%) of the game balls hit to the right in the situation with the electric sapo are in the 2-1 start winning opening 63A. A prize is awarded, and even if the big prize opening 92 is opened with a small win, the prize is hardly won in the big prize opening 92.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the 1st RUSH and 3rd RUSH where electric sapo is performed, it is unlikely that the number of balls will increase.

For this reason, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to create a situation in which the player can increase the number of winning balls without using an electric support. In a game situation other than the big win game, it is possible to increase the number of obtained balls by the small win even without executing the electric support.

Further, whether or not a small win is executed and the period when it is executed are completed for each variation as described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A having an electric sapo function is arranged above the big winning opening 92, and as described above, relatively many (here, 90% degree) game balls are entered.

However, by making the second RUSH a game without an electric sapo, during the second RUSH, the game balls are not intercepted by the 2-1 start winning opening 63A, and the number of balls acquired by the player can be more reliably increased. It is designed to be excessive with respect to the number of shot game balls. In other words, in the "small hit RUSH" which is a probability change without an electric sapo, the game ball is not intercepted by the electric chew (2-1 start prize opening 63A), so as to win the big prize opening 92 during the small hit. , allowing the player to increase the number of winning balls. The feature of the game performance in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment is how to increase the number of winning balls by continuously drawing small wins without drawing big wins during the "small win RUSH". ing.

It should be noted that, in such a game property of the pachinko gaming machine 10, as described above, it is difficult (or impossible) to increase the number of winning balls by using the electric support. On the other hand, in the second RUSH, which is a small hit RUSH, there is an expectation that more game balls than the number of shots will be obtained due to the small hit. Therefore, it can be said that it is more advantageous to win a big hit without an electric sapo. For this reason, it is considered that one of the main purposes of the game for the player is to draw a variable hit with no electric support and shift to a small hit RUSH.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the 2-2 start winning opening 63B that does not have an electric sapo function is provided, and even during the normal game period when the electric sapo is not performed, by hitting right, It is possible to generate a starting prize according to FIG. However, as described above, the fluctuation time related to the special figure 2 at normal time is as long as 10 minutes at the maximum. To give an extreme example, if the four holds related to Special Figure 2 all correspond to a 10-minute fluctuation pattern, it may take 40 minutes to execute and digest all hold memories. possible.

In addition, as described above, about 100 game balls can be fired continuously in one minute. Game balls are consumed. However, by limiting the number of game balls that can be obtained by a small hit to a number that does not exceed the number of shots, the time efficiency is reduced and the start prize according to the special figure 2 is aimed at normal times. It is possible to remove the desire.
<Relationship between the effect during the first jackpot game and the second RUSH effect>

Next, the relationship between the second RUSH effect executed in the above-described second RUSH (FIG. 19, etc.) and the effect during the big hit game executed in the previous stage (here, the effect during the first big win game) will be described. The second RUSH effect in which the second RUSH effect is performed is a game state that shifts after the first bonus, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 .

As described above, the first bonus is a 16R probability variable jackpot provided for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Thus, in this embodiment, all first bonuses are accompanied by a small hit RUSH (second RUSH). Furthermore, the effect executed in the second RUSH game state is the second RUSH effect described later. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the production related to the first bonus accompanied by the second RUSH, the "first big hit game production" is executed, and as part of the production performed at a predetermined timing of the first big hit game production, "Production exceeding the standard" can be performed.

The above-mentioned "reference-exceeding effect" that can be executed during the first big win game can give the impression that a small win RUSH is being executed during the big win game in cooperation with the second RUSH and the second RUSH effect that shift later. It is a thing. FIGS. 22(a) to 22(c) show an example of this criterion-exceeding effect.

Among them, FIG. 22(a) shows that the 16R jackpot game progresses through the state of waiting for the jackpot game from the variation in which the first bonus is won, and then to the second RUSH, which is the small hit RUSH. A series of game state changes from left to right are shown until transition. Here, "fluctuating", "standby", "1R" to "16R", and "second RUSH" shown in the upper part of FIG. The upper part shows the game state, and the lower part shows the effects that are externally presented to the player.

In the example of FIG. 22(a), a jackpot start demonstration for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot is executed "during fluctuation". Furthermore, during the variation, in addition to the jackpot start demonstration, the effect attacker 93 described above is to be released. In addition, during the standby, a right-handed effect is executed, and when the player hits to the right and the game ball passes through the operation opening 68 (passes the combination operation gate), a 16R jackpot game related to the first bonus is performed. be started.

Here, it is assumed that the number of prize balls that can actually be expected in the first bonus (also referred to as "the number of balls released") is 2400. Then, in the effect during the first big win game related to the first bonus, as shown in FIG. 22(b), the reference number display area 362 is displayed on the effect display device 60 (including the sub display and the like). In the reference number display area 362, a number such as "2000" is displayed as the reference number, which is smaller than the number of prize balls that can actually be expected (here, 2400). Here, in the examples of FIGS. 22(b) and (c), a round number and count number display area 363 for displaying the number of rounds and the number of counts during the jackpot game is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible not to display the number of rounds or the number of counts. In this case, it is conceivable that it is easy to give the impression to the player that the ball released during the big win game has been won by the small win RUSH.

The display of the reference number is, for example, "100/2000", "500/2000", "100/2000", "500/2000", etc., as the jackpot game of the first bonus progresses and the number of paid out prize balls (or the number of prize balls to be paid out) increases. "1000/2000", ..., "1500/2000", and "1900/2000" are sequentially increased. When the display of the number of prize balls reaches "2000" at a predetermined timing (for example, the 14th round), the display becomes "2000" as shown in FIG. 22(c), and the number of prize balls has reached the reference number. A notification will be made to that effect.

And, although the game state on control is the 14th R (or 15th or 16th R) during the first big win game, the content of the first big win game production shifts to the second RUSH production. The example of FIG. 22(b) shows an example of immediately shifting to the second RUSH effect at the 14th R when the number of prize balls reaches 2000 pieces.

Even after the number of prize balls reaches the reference number, the payout of the number of prize balls is continued. The display mode of the number of prize balls at this time is not shown, but is displayed separately from the reference number (here, 2000), such as "2100/2000" or "2200/2000". I can give an example of things that accumulate. Further, for example, the display of only the reference number (here, the display of "2000") as shown in FIG. All of the various displays relating to the reference number as exemplified here display the cumulative total of the number of paid balls obtained during the big win game and the number of paid balls obtained in the small winning RUSH. ing.

Furthermore, when the number of prize balls reaches 2400, which is the maximum number of balls to be put out during the big win game, and the 16th round big win game ends in terms of control, the game state in terms of control shifts to the second RUSH. Then, the state in which the game state for control and the game state for presentation are made to differ from each other is changed to a state in which they are made to match, and the subsequent game control proceeds.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A having an electric support function is arranged above the big winning opening 92 (see FIG. 18(b)). In addition, the 2-2nd starting prize-winning opening 63B is also provided, and the 2-2nd starting prize-winning opening 63B is of a type in which a ball can always enter. Further, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is opened even during the jackpot game, if a game ball is detected at the operating opening and if there is a winning lottery related to the variable normal symbol. During the jackpot game, a prize ball is also generated by entering the 2-1 start prize-winning hole 63A. For these reasons, the total number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game includes the number of prize balls entered into the 2-1 start prize-winning opening 63A and the 2-2 start prize-winning opening 63B.

However, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out by one ball entering the 2-1 start prize-winning port 63A or the 2-2 start prize-winning port 63B is set to a relatively small number (eg, 1). , The number of balls at the time of electric support is not excessive.

It should be noted that the display of the standard number of prize balls can be calculated from a theoretical value based on the winning points and the number of winning balls. Further, for example, a game ball sensor capable of detecting the number of discharged balls may be provided in the payout unit 35 or the prize ball discharge passage 36 to measure the number of discharged balls. This can also be applied to the display of the ball entering state indicator 808 (FIG. 5) described above.

In the pachinko gaming machine 10 that performs the "standard-exceeding effect" as described above, the number of acquired balls (here, 2000) that is smaller than the number of balls that can be acquired during the first jackpot game (here, 2,000) ) is determined as the reference number. Then, the second RUSH effect is started at the timing before the number of winning balls during the first jackpot game reaches the maximum value. Therefore, the start timing of the second RUSH effect can be brought forward, and the second RUSH effect can be executed at the timing (here, the final stage) during the first jackpot game.

Furthermore, in terms of performance, it is possible to advance the timing of entering the small winning RUSH (second RUSH) zone, and it is possible to use the second RUSH performance as part of the first big winning game performance. Then, in the second RUSH, it is possible for the player to recognize that a predetermined number of game balls (here, about 400 shots of the difference) have been acquired in the second RUSH. ) can be broadened and the taste of games using small wins can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, the reference number display area 362 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 2RUSH effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to start the second RUSH effect after giving the player the recognition that 2000 is the maximum number of balls that can be obtained in the first jackpot game. Then, the player can be more surely recognized that the remaining game balls (here, 400 balls) acquired during the big win game are those acquired during the second RUSH in terms of game control. .

Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, by starting the second RUSH effect during the jackpot game, it is possible to give the player the impression that the second RUSH continues for as long as possible. Then, even if the second RUSH is immediately dropped (or immediately dropped) in terms of control, it is possible to show the player the second RUSH effect over a longer period of time, and the player will be in a happy state with benefits. It can prevent people from thinking, "It's over so quickly."

Here, in other words, the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment changes the timing when the number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game (here, 2400) is not reached, and the following game state production (here, the second RUSH It can be said that it is the start timing of the production). In addition, the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment is said to be able to seamlessly show the player during the jackpot game the effects during the jackpot game to the second RUSH effect. be able to. Furthermore, the game state of the second RUSH and the start timing of the second RUSH effect are different, and it can be said that the second RUSH effect is started before the game state of the second RUSH.

In addition, while performing the effect control as described above, depending on the type of big hit, it is also possible to start the second RUSH effect after the big hit game on the control is completed without performing the "standard exceeding effect". . Furthermore, if the type of jackpot won is of a relatively small number of rounds (for example, 6R), the "standard-exceeding effect" is not performed, and the final round (here, the 6Rth ) is completed, it is also possible to start the second RUSH effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 23(a), it is also possible to incorporate an effect during the jackpot game provided for the jackpot game of another bonus as the effect during the first jackpot game. In the example of FIG. 23(a), the 3rd jackpot game effect provided to be executed during the 3rd bonus jackpot game is executed over the 1st to 5th rounds of the 1st jackpot game. In other words, the effect during the big win game is started as if the third bonus was won despite the occurrence of the first bonus.

As described above, the 3rd bonus is a 6R probability variable jackpot, and there is a large percentage of shifting to the 1st RUSH with an electric sapo. Then, when the third big win game performance relating to the third bonus is executed from the 1st R, the performance continues for up to 6Rs. In the example of FIG. 23(a), the effect during the third big winning game is executed up to the fifth R of the first big winning game. Then, at the 6th round, a predetermined promotion performance is executed, and the performance is switched to the first jackpot game performance.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize that he/she has won the first bonus at 16R without the electric sapo, not the third bonus with the electric sapo at 6R, at the timing during the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 23(a), a reference number display area 362 is displayed as shown in FIG. content shifts to the second RUSH effect. In the example of FIG. 23(a), unlike the example of FIG. 22(a), as shown on the left end of the figure, the opening effect of the effect attacker 93 is not performed during the fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the effects during the first big win game accompanied by the "performance beyond the standard", and it is possible to improve the taste of the game properties accompanied by the small win RUSH.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), it is also possible to continuously perform the second RUSH effect from the 1R as the effect during the first jackpot game. The example of FIG. 23(b) shows a jackpot form in which the first bonus is won in the second RUSH. there is Furthermore, in this example, the second RUSH effect is executed during the fluctuation related to the second RUSH, and the second RUSH effect here does not notify that the big hit has been won.

After the fluctuation ends, the second RUSH effect is executed through the right-handed effect. Furthermore, the second RUSH effect after shifting to the first big win game is continued over 16R, and the second RUSH effect is continued even after shifting from the first big win game to the second RUSH. Further, in this example, the "reference-exceeding effect" as shown in FIGS. 22(a) to (c) and FIG. 23(a) is not performed.

Here, there is no clear boundary in performance between the second RUSH performance during the first jackpot game and the second RUSH performance in the second RUSH thereafter, and the player is actively notified of the transition to the second RUSH. It is possible not to In addition, the right-handed effect is also limited, for example, by displaying only the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow in the upper right corner of the screen, and the content of the second RUSH effect is continuous even during the right-handed effect. It is possible to continue with

22(a), 23(a), and 23(b) can be executed according to the number of times the big hits have been played. For example, when the number of jackpot hits is relatively small, such as one, the effect shown in FIG. 22(a) is executed, and when the number of times of consecutive games is predetermined, for example, two times or more, the effect shown in FIG. 23(a) is executed. It is possible to execute Furthermore, when the number of consecutive games is, for example, 3 or more and the first big win is won during the second RUSH, it is possible to execute the effect shown in FIG. 23(b).

Also, for example, when only a predetermined number of balls (less than 2000 shots, etc.) can be obtained during the jackpot game, a pattern effect such as entering the second RUSH effect in the end demonstration related to the jackpot game is performed. It is also possible to execute
<Production mode using production attacker>

Next, a specific example of an effect using the effect attacker 93 described above will be described. The effect attacker 93 starts opening for a relatively long predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) in the middle of the big hit variation, which is the variation for the big hit. Furthermore, when the opening time of 30 seconds elapses, the effect attacker 93 closes the door for a relatively short predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then repeats the opening for 30 seconds and closing for 3 seconds. In other words, the effect attacker 93 performs opening and closing in an operation pattern in which long opening and short opening are repeated in order.

By operating the effect attacker 93 during the big win variation in this way, the effect by the operation of the falling door 94 can be performed before the big win game. Then, by using the performance attacker 93, it is possible to give the player an impression as if a big win game was started during the variation.

In addition, it is possible to perform a series of operations from the action of the performance attacker 93 to the opening of the large winning prize opening 92, so that the large winning prize opening 92 can exhibit the function as a production device. Furthermore, it is possible to use the performance attacker 93 as a winning performance that definitely indicates with a high degree of expectation that a big win will occur.

The effect using the effect attacker 93 can be performed in combination with the effect of sound output, the effect of light decoration, etc. at various timings such as during fluctuation or during the jackpot game. Moreover, the production using the production attacker 93 can be adopted by selecting some production stages (such as the first RUSH production stage and the third RUSH production stage). In particular, in the case of the above-mentioned second RUSH effect, it may start at the beginning or in the middle of the jackpot game, and the setting of the start timing of the effect using the effect attacker 93 becomes complicated. It is also possible not to perform an effect using 93. Also, unlike this, it is possible to further diversify the effect for utilizing the small hit by using the effect attacker 93 by performing the effect using the effect attacker 93 in the second RUSH effect.

In addition, regarding the operation pattern of the effect attacker 93, the duty ratio of the solenoid can be optimized by interposing a closing period (here, 3 seconds) and turning off the solenoid (effect attacker solenoid) during the closing period. , the seizure of the solenoid can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the closing period of 3 seconds described above, white light is emitted using reflection and refraction on the light guide plate of the decorative portion 90a, and the front portion of the effect attacker 93 is blocked with white light. so that it can be During the closing period of 3 seconds, it is made difficult for the player to visually recognize the performance attacker 93 so that the closed state of the performance attacker 93 cannot be seen (or becomes difficult to see). In this case, it is conceivable that the degree of visibility is such that a player in an average game posture cannot visually recognize the appearance of the effect attacker 93 in that posture. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear that the effect attacker 93 is open longer than it actually is. In other words, it is possible to make it appear that the performance attacker 93 is always open from the big win game to the small win RUSH.

Moreover, in this embodiment, other effects using the effect attacker 93 are provided. For example, as an announcement effect (attacker release announcement) using the effect attacker 93, there is one in which release is performed when a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation button 22 may be activated during the presentation to indicate whether or not the expectation of winning with a high probability or the expectation of development of the reach is relatively high. A plurality of patterns are provided as such effects, and one of them can be set to open the effect attacker 93 in accordance with the start timing of the effective period of the operation button 22, for example. Further, it is possible to make another effect such that the operation button 22 becomes effective for a predetermined number of times (once, twice, etc.) during the battle effect, and the effect attacker 93 is opened each time it becomes effective. be.

Furthermore, as the opening pattern of the effect attacker 93, it is possible to provide a pattern in which the opening time is medium (for example, 2 seconds), or a pattern in which the opening time is extremely short (less than 1 second, etc.). . In addition, when the effect attacker 93 is released, the effect display device 60, the center decoration 64, etc., display a conspicuous red or rainbow-colored image, emit light, etc., and actively notify the player of the release of the effect attacker 93. It is possible to provide a notification effect. Furthermore, it is possible to provide an effect (silent release effect) in which the effect attacker 93 is released without any special notification.

Moreover, it is possible to perform the effect using the effect attacker 93 only once (one set) for one variation, or to perform multiple times (multiple sets) for one variation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effect using the effect attacker 93 from being performed as a look-ahead effect, or to perform it as a look-ahead effect as well.

In addition, in this embodiment, as another effect, the effect is provided by opening the effect attacker 93 and opening the big winning opening 92 in cooperation. In this effect pattern, the timing of opening the effect attacker 93 is determined based on the timing of opening the large winning opening 92 located above. Then, the performance attacker 93 is opened with a predetermined time delay (here, two seconds, etc.) from the opening/closing timing of the big winning opening 92 . By doing so, the effect attacker 93 cooperates with the big winning opening 92 in a manner following the big winning opening 92, picks up the game balls, and prevents the game balls from falling out. It is possible to perform.

It is also possible to link the opening of the performance attacker 93 and the opening of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A located above, not limited to the big winning opening 92. For example, similar to the example of the large winning opening 92 described above, it is conceivable to delay the opening timing of the large winning opening 92 by a predetermined time (eg, 2 to 3 seconds) to open the effect attacker 93 . By doing so, as in the case of the big winning hole 92, the effect attacker 93 cooperates with the 2-1 start winning hole 63A to perform an effect to prevent the game balls from falling out. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect attacker 93 continues to open even after the result of the big hit is displayed. The performance attacker 93 remains open until a game ball is detected at the above-described operation opening 68 which also functions as a combination operation opening. Furthermore, a predetermined time (for example, 85 minutes) is set as the maximum openable time of the effect attacker 93 . When this predetermined time elapses while the performance attacker 93 is open, the performance attacker 93 is forcibly closed.

By doing so, for example, in the situation before the result of the big win is displayed during the fluctuation of the big win, or in the situation where the game ball is not detected in the combination activation opening after the result of the big win is displayed, Even if the player leaves his seat to eat, make a phone call, or the like and is absent, the performance attacker 93 can be prevented from being opened unlimitedly. And even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the seizure of the solenoid (effect attacker solenoid), and it is possible to keep the state of the pachinko game machine 10 properly for a longer period of time. Incidentally, it is also possible to open the performance attacker 93 during the small winning RUSH and continue the release of the performance attacker 93 until the small winning RUSH is finished.
<Pattern of opening the big winning opening in the jackpot game based on the transition from the electric sapo period>

In this embodiment, the 2R jackpot (striking (battle defeat)) is provided as described above, but the opening time is different between the 1st and 2nd rounds in the jackpot game of the 2R jackpot. Then, on the 1st R, it is opened for a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), and then opened for a relatively long time (for example, 6 seconds). It's becoming In this way, by performing opening in a special pattern (mode) such as opening a plurality of times in the 1R, the player can make a so-called stopping shot or a single shot at the time of transition from the electric support period to the big hit game period. (Hereinafter referred to as "stopping shots, etc."), it is possible to play a fair game with the number of output balls close to the design value.

That is, in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A having the electrical support function is arranged above the big winning opening 92, as described above. Also, when hitting to the right, relatively many (about 90% here) game balls enter the 2-1 start winning opening 63A due to the opening of the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A (operation of the electric sapo). It's like Furthermore, even if the ball enters the 2-1 start winning opening 63A or the 2-2 starting winning opening 63B, only a very small number (here, 1 ball) can be obtained.

In addition, the opening of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is performed after the normal symbol stops after passing through the fluctuation period. Therefore, if there is a hold related to the normal symbol, the frequency of opening the 2-1 start winning opening 63A increases. In addition, since the fluctuation time associated with the normal symbols is not constant, it is not easy for the player to predict the opening timing of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A.

Furthermore, the opening of the big winning opening 92 is carried out after a period of a predetermined jackpot start demonstration or the like from the stoppage of the special symbols and the performance symbols (190a to 190c). For this reason, for example, when a big hit occurs during the electric support period and shifts to a big win game, factors such as the fluctuation period of the drawn normal symbols, the fluctuation period of the special symbols, and the execution period of the jackpot start demonstration Depending on the situation, the opening of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A and the opening of the big winning opening 92 may overlap and occur at the same timing. In addition, the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A may open just before the opening of the big winning opening 92 may occur.

From these things, for example, even when the game ball is shot after the big winning opening 92 is opened, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is open due to the win of the normal symbol immediately before becoming a big hit. Then, it is considered that the subsequent game balls enter the 2-1 start winning opening 63A without reaching the big winning opening 92 at a high rate.

As described above, the number of game balls paid out by one ball entering the 2-1 start winning hole 63A (here, one ball) is paid out by one ball entering the big winning hole 92. It is less than the number of game balls (here, 15). Therefore, if the game ball enters the 2-1 start winning opening 63A although the big winning opening 92 is open, the player loses the expected profit. In order to prevent such a loss of profit, the player aims at the timing of the start of opening of the big winning opening 92, stops shooting and performs stopping shots, etc. It is conceivable to avoid entering the ball into 63A or the 2-2 start winning opening 63B.

However, it is designed on the premise that when such stop shots are made, the actual difference ball (the number of winning balls into the big winning hole 92 - the number of balls fired during the big win) will continue to be launched at equal intervals. It may be far from the assumption at the stage. As a result, the fairness of the game and the balance between the profits of the players and the game halls are impaired.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the opening for a relatively long time (for example, 6 seconds) is performed at the end of the 1R, and the timing (period) of opening the large winning opening 92 for a long time in the 1R is set to 2-1. By delaying until the end of the opening of the starting prize-winning port 63A (the operation of the electric sapo), the difference in the profit of the player between the case where the stop shot or the like is performed and the case where the stop shot or the like is not performed can be reduced or eliminated, and the superiority of the stop shot or the like. can be reduced. As a result, by using the board configuration for the small winning RUSH, stopping shots and the like are suppressed, and fair games are promoted.
<Zone notice with 1 change (specific zone notice)>

Subsequently, among the various provided advance notice effects, the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as "specific zone notice") provided on the assumption that it is adapted to a single change will be described. This specific zone notice is an effect (zone effect) that continues only once during one fluctuation and continues until the end of the change, and is a notice effect with a high degree of expectation just by occurring. Furthermore, during the specific zone notice, among the effects that predict the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit and reach development due to the difference in coloring, only the color notice effect that indicates relatively high reliability will appear. It has become.

For example, when performing a notice effect that notifies the reliability by the color of the notice, such as a comment notice or a cut-in notice, the lottery is performed so that only the notice effect of red or higher, which indicates a relatively high degree of reliability, appears. If a notice effect with less than red (reliability) is selected, a process of replacing it with red is performed. Also, during the notice of the specific zone, for example, it is a production of red flames burning around the characters, appearing in one change, and shall be continued until the end of the change at that time. can be done.

Such a specific zone notice suggests that it will appear during the previous fluctuation as a look-ahead (for example, deterministically notifying), if it appears during the fluctuation before reach in the fluctuation at that time, or It is possible to make it so that it may appear during the reach of the fluctuation at that time. Further, since the mode of the specific zone notice is limited to color tones related to high expectations such as red or higher, it may appear repeatedly over a plurality of fluctuations, or may be executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation. It is thought that the value will be diluted and it will not be possible to use it effectively.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of executions of the specific zone notice is adjusted so that, once the specific zone notice appears, it continues only until the end of the fluctuation at that time.

In this embodiment, in the sub-main board 301, when it is determined by a pre-read lottery that the specific zone notice is to be executed with a certain variation, the pre-read effect is suggested. Furthermore, a performance lottery is performed so as not to execute the specific zone notice in the fluctuation before a certain fluctuation, and the production is determined, and when deciding the production to be executed in a certain fluctuation, the specific zone notice decided by the foreseeing lottery and A dedicated lottery is used for avoiding duplicate lottery for specific zone notices. As a result, it is possible to execute the specific zone notice without any discrepancies, which is an important high-expectation effect.

In the present embodiment, when executing the specific zone advance notice, there is a case where the pre-stage effect (introduction effect of the specific zone advance notice) is executed. As such an introductory effect, for example, it is conceivable to execute a predetermined change effect and vibrate the operation button 22 after the change effect.

Various effects can be considered as the change effect, such as making the movable effect member appear, causing the movable effect member to perform a predetermined action, and displaying an image. Furthermore, as the introductory effect, only one of the change effect and the actuation of the operation button 22 can be performed.
<Design stock production>

In this embodiment, a symbol stock effect may be executed as one type of effect. As shown in FIG. 24(a1), this pattern stock effect is a mode in which when a predetermined type of effect pattern (here, one having the meaning of the number "7") appears, the effect pattern is reduced. stock symbol 366 is displayed in a stock symbol display area 367 arranged at a predetermined position on the screen, as shown in FIG. 24(a2).

The image of the stock symbol 366 is not limited to a reduced version of the "7" effect symbol as long as it expresses that it corresponds to the "7" effect symbol 190a. In addition, as the appearance timing of the stock symbol 366, the timing of stopping (including temporary stop) of the effect symbol 190a of "7" and the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 190a of "7" are slowed down so that the player can recognize the symbol. Various timings can be exemplified, such as the timing when it becomes possible.

Furthermore, as the mode of appearance of the stock symbol 366, the effect symbol 190a of "7" itself is moved to the stock symbol display area 367, or the stock symbol 366 is caused to appear from the effect symbol 190a of "7" to the stock symbol display area. 367 can be exemplified.

Also, as shown in FIG. 24(b1), when two "7" symbols (190a, 190b) appear on the screen, two stock symbols 190d are stacked as shown in FIG. 24(b2). are displayed side by side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 24(c1), a pattern image 368 other than the production patterns 190a to 190c is cut-in displayed during the variable production, and a stock pattern 369 associated with this pattern image 368 is displayed in a stock pattern display area 367. It is also possible to display in

In addition, the variation pattern related to the symbol stock effect is selected by the main board 102, and the variation on the sub-main board 301 is based on the type of the symbol stock effect specified (specified) by the main variation pattern. Patterns (sub-variation patterns) are determined. In other words, all main variation patterns are created with information on the number of symbols to be stocked, as partly shown in FIG. For example, in FIG. The main variation pattern having the information of "0 times" indicated by 80's "0 hits 1st battle victory" etc. represents the main variation pattern with the meaning of not stocking the symbols as a look-ahead effect.

Therefore, when it is decided to perform the symbol stock effect by the effect lottery performed on the sub-main board 301, the main variation pattern meaning 0 times is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 as described above. However, as a result, the symbol stock effect is performed. Then, for example, the number of stocks represented by the main variation pattern is represented by N1 (natural number including 0), and the number of stocks determined by the effect lottery on the sub-main board 301 is represented by N2 (natural number including 0). Then, the total number of stock symbols N (a natural number including 0) appearing on the screen can be expressed as N1+N2 (=N).

Furthermore, in FIG. No. 38 "1 time normal A" and No. The main variation pattern with "once" information indicated by 96 "1 time per mission second half of battle" etc. represents the main variation pattern in which one stock symbol (366 etc.) is displayed as a look-ahead effect. ing. When these main variation patterns are transmitted to the sub-main board 301, one symbol stock is performed by the start of the corresponding variation at that time (the variation). Then, when the number of stocks is added by the effect lottery of the sub-main board 301, the number of symbol stocks including the added amount is carried out by the end of the variation.

Also, No. in FIG. 68 "Late half of 2nd battle" and No. The main variation pattern with "twice" information indicated by 102 "twice battle second half reach" etc., has two stock symbols (366, 369, etc.) by the start of the corresponding variation at that time (the variation). ) represents the main fluctuation pattern displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 75's "3 lost 2nd battle first half", and No. The main variation pattern with the information of "three times" indicated by such as "hit three times specific zone" of 115 is three stock symbols (366, 369, etc.) by the start of the corresponding variation at that time (the variation). represents the main fluctuation pattern displayed.

Also, when the main variation pattern of the reach is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, the effect lottery of the sub-main board 301 includes elements such as whether or not the reach by the effect pattern of "7" is determined, and the corresponding The final number of stocks until the reach fluctuation (the reach fluctuation) ends is determined.

Furthermore, the structure of the main variation pattern is different, distinguishing how many symbols are stocked even if the main variation pattern shows the same content of reach. For example, although only one is illustrated, when the main variation pattern (No. 102) of "reach twice in the second half of the battle" is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, the corresponding reach variation (the variation that becomes reach) Two stock symbols (366, etc.) will be displayed before the start. In addition, when the main variation pattern (not shown) of "hit 3 times battle second half reach" is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, three stocks are available by the start of the corresponding reach variation (the variation that becomes reach). This is where the symbols (366, 368, etc.) are displayed.

The sub-main board 301 that has received these main variation patterns stocks the designated number of symbols according to the number of reservations. For example, when the game is on hold, the specified number of symbols are stocked by the change at that time (the change) by using the change related to the look-ahead. In addition, when the reservation is not made, the specified number of symbol stocks are performed only by the variation at that time (the variation concerned).

For example, in the state of one hold, for example, when the main variation pattern of "2 times 2nd battle second half" is selected, one symbol stock is performed as a look-ahead effect in the previous variation, and the remaining 1 in the variation It is possible to do one symbol stock. Further, in such a case, the sub-main board 301 can perform two symbol stocks in the current variation without performing the symbol stock in the previous variation. In this case, if the main variation pattern received for the variation specifies reach with "7" symbols, it is possible to perform two symbol stocks following reach display with two "7" symbols. is.

In addition, when the number of pending items is 0, for example, when the main variation pattern of "lose twice in the second half of the second battle" is selected as the main variation pattern of the variation, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 24(c1) It is possible to perform two pattern stocks by adjusting by performing cut-in display of the image 368 twice.

In this way, the sub-main board 301 can recognize the number of symbols to be stocked based on the main variation pattern. Then, in the sub-main board 301, it is possible to decide whether to perform the symbol stock effect as the look-ahead effect or to perform the symbol stock effect by the variation. Furthermore, in the sub-main board 301, it is possible to determine how many stock symbols are used for the effect based on the main variation pattern.

Furthermore, it is not limited to the look-ahead effect, but it is also possible to carry out pattern stock with the appearance of an image that triggers a "7" pattern, etc., by means of a pseudo-continuous notice effect that is performed during one variation. Then, it is possible to increase the number of stock symbols (368, etc.) according to the number of consecutive pseudo-continuous advance notices.

As the number of stock symbols (368, etc.) accumulated on the screen increases due to such various symbol stock effects, the selection rate of effects with low frequency of occurrence or low frequency of appearance usually increases. Examples of productions that occur or appear less frequently here include changes in suspension, relief production (resurrection after a character fails in some action, etc.), pseudo-ren development (development to pseudo-ren), etc. can be exemplified. Furthermore, when these effects are executed, the stock symbols (368, etc.) accumulated at that time are used and moved out of the screen or erased.

As described above, according to the symbol stock effect of the present embodiment, the information on the number of stocks is included in the main variation pattern. Therefore, it is easy to reflect the information held by the main board 102 (such as information on the number of reserved games) in the effect control by the sub-main board 301 . Then, for example, the relationship between the pending number display and the look-ahead effect shown to the player as effects and the display of stock symbols (such as 368) is such that information such as the presence or absence of a big hit is detected in advance by the player. Also, it is possible to prevent the sub-main board 301 from deteriorating the performance effect of the stock symbols (368, etc.).

Furthermore, according to the symbol stock rendering of the present embodiment, sub-main variation patterns can be reduced compared to the case where stock number information is included only in the sub-main variation patterns on the sub-main board 301 . In addition, in the process of determining the effect pattern on the sub-main board 301, there is no need to perform branch processing based on the difference in the number of stocks, and the process of determining the effect pattern on the sub-main board 301 can be facilitated. can. Then, it is possible to increase the processing capacity to be directed to the performance related to the small hit RUSH (second RUSH) and other performances.

In addition, as an opportunity for the appearance of the stock symbols (368, etc.), something other than the production patterns (190a, 190c) (here, the cut-in pattern image 368) is used, so the target production pattern (here, " 7" production pattern) is not essential. Therefore, when the stock symbols (368, etc.) appear, the degree of freedom in rendering is high, and it is easy to adjust the number of renderings until the stock symbols (368, etc.) appear. Then, for example, a fixed number of symbol stocks can be easily carried out without performing a pseudo-continuous advance notice or re-fluctuation of the ready-to-win symbols.

It should be noted that, in such a symbol stock effect, the fluctuation time is extended by the above-mentioned variable additional information, so that the time limit of the effect is relaxed and the degree of freedom of the effect (symbol stock effect) is increased. It can be said. Also, the symbol stock production can be performed in all productions, or only in one production stage (for example, a limited production stage such as the second RUSH production stage). be able to. Also, it is possible to execute the symbol stock effect in combination with the above-described change effect, and a specific aspect thereof will be described later.
<Prevention of aiming for small hits related to special figure 2 at normal time>

In the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, measures are taken to prevent a small hit from being targeted during a game with a normal probability (low probability, no time saving), which is not a right-handed situation. This preventive measure will be explained below.

In this embodiment, as described above, there is no priority between the special figures 1 and 2, and the parallel lottery game property in which the game related to the special figure 1 and the game related to the special figure 2 can proceed in parallel Adopted. For this reason, it is also possible to play a game in which a small hit is aimed at by daring to hit to the right at the time of normal probability assuming the game of special figure 1. - 特許庁

Then, if the variable time related to the special figure 2 can be estimated by the player based on the content of the effect, for example, when the small win is won, the opening timing of the big winning opening 92 is set to some extent. It is considered that it can be estimated accurately (or accurately). If a stop shot or the like is performed aiming at the estimated timing, it becomes difficult to play a fair game that assumes continuous shooting at equal intervals.

Therefore, in this embodiment, it is difficult to estimate the fluctuation time related to the special figure 2. More specifically, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 at the time of normal probability is determined after the fact by combining the variation additional information with the main variation pattern that is the basis. A plurality of types of variable additional information having different variable times are provided as the variable additional information. Therefore, as described above, the types of variation patterns that can be specified from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 are increased. Variable additional information that can be selected here includes, for example, 12 seconds, 15 seconds, 18 seconds, 24 seconds, or 30 seconds.

Further, a large number of variable additional information are provided in this embodiment in addition to those that can be selected here. However, the variation additional information used as a countermeasure for aiming for a small win (aiming for the opening timing of the big winning opening) is provided for pseudo-continuous advance notice. For example, as the variable additional information for the pseudo-continuous advance notice, one for one-time pseudo-continuous advance notice, two-time pseudo-continuous advance notice, and three-time pseudo-continuous advance notice are provided.

Further, as the variation additional information for one pseudo-continuous notice, a plurality of types are provided, such as 12-second variation, 24-second variation, and 30-second variation. Similarly, a plurality of types such as 12 seconds, 15 seconds, 24 seconds, and 30 seconds are provided as the variable additional information for two pseudo-continuous advance notices. In addition, a plurality of types, such as 18 seconds, 24 seconds, and 30 seconds, are provided as the variable additional information for three pseudo-continuous advance notices. Then, the pseudo-continuous variation additional information table defining the variation additional information for these pseudo continuous advance notices is used also when determining the variation additional information for the special figure 2 at the time of normal probability.

For example, if the main variation pattern of special figure 2 received by the sub-main board 301 at the time of the normal probability of special figure 2 is 5 minutes, a pseudo-continuous variation additional information table (not shown) is referred to, and defined in the table One of the received variable additional information is selected by lottery. And, for example, when the variation additional information of 18 seconds is selected, 18 seconds are added to 5 minutes by the main variation pattern, and the variation time of the special figure 2 is determined to 5 minutes and 18 seconds. Also, for example, when the variation additional information of 30 seconds is selected, the variation time of the special figure 2 is extended to 5 minutes and 30 seconds.

As described above, by combining the variation additional information (time value information) for performance used in the pseudo-continuous lottery with the variation time of the small win, the total variation time at the time of occurrence of the small win can be varied. . Then, when a small hit occurs, it is possible to make it difficult to launch the game ball aiming at the opening timing of the big winning hole 92.例文帳に追加

As a result, it is possible to prevent a stop shot or the like. Then, it becomes possible to perform processing for managing the number of balls to be played by the variation additional information provided for the effect. Also, in other words, it is possible to prevent the small hit aim without having the time value information for the small hit aim prevention.

In addition, since the variable additional information for preventing small hits is not provided and the variable additional information for pseudo continuous notice is also used, the data for the variable additional information (memory address value or stored at that address) The variation time can be made less predictable without increasing the variety of data values to be processed.

Here, as described above, the reason why the variation additional information for pseudo-continuous notice is used to prevent the small hit of the special figure 2 at the time of normal probability is that in this embodiment, the variety of variation additional information is the largest. This is because the effect type is a pseudo-continuous advance notice effect. By doing so, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 at the time of normal probability can be diversified as much as possible. In addition, if there is an effect type having more variable additional information than that for pseudo-continuous advance notice, the variable additional information related to the effect type may be used for prevention of aiming for a small hit.
<Transition effect between special figure 1 and special figure 2>

In the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the parallel lottery game feature is adopted as described above. Then, if the condition for starting the fluctuation of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) is established, the fluctuation of the special symbol starts without waiting for the other special figure 2 (or special figure 1) to be held and the fluctuation ends. be done. Therefore, the prediction of the transition between the game (first game) according to the special figure 1 and the game (second game) according to the special figure 2 is such that one (for example, special figure 2) is given priority It is more difficult than the case.

For example, there may be a start winning prize related to special figure 2 during fluctuation of loss related to special figure 1, and a case of winning a big hit in the big hit lottery related to this special figure 2 may occur. In this embodiment, in such a case, the content of the production is changed from the variable production being executed according to the special figure 1 to the variable production according to the special figure 2 (changing the variable display content). .

Although illustration is omitted as a mode of change from the variable performance related to the special figure 1 to the variable performance related to the special figure 2, the variable performance related to the special figure 1 is hidden and the production contents are switched to those of the special figure 2 can be considered. A series of effects performed in such a transition situation can be referred to as a "transition effect". This "transition effect" is executed when there is a big hit with a special figure that is not the main (not the main) (when an irregular big hit occurs) during normal times or during the electric sapo. The special figure that is not the main is, for example, special figure 2 at normal time and special figure 1 during electric sapo. The variation pattern in the case of such an irregular winning is relatively short-time, and is sometimes called, for example, "sudden winning effect".

Also, as different from the above-mentioned transition effect, the transparency of the variable effect related to the special figure 1 is increased to make it appear lighter than before, and the moving image of the variable effect related to the special figure 2 is superimposed there. can be displayed as In this case, for example, the contents of the variable effect related to the special figure 2 are counted down like "3", "2", "1", and while the count of "3" is being performed It is possible to make the effect related to FIG. 1 disappear and the variable effect of only the special figure 2 to be visually recognized, and to proceed with the remaining effects of "2" and "1".

Also, as a transition effect, in the variable effect related to the special figure 1, for example, if an inconspicuous mode such as the mini symbol or the guaranteed symbol described above is displayed, these mini effect symbols related to the special figure 1 It is also possible to leave only the display of the guarantee pattern, and to perform a variable production related to the special figure 2 as another production. In this case, it is also possible to display the mini effect design and the guaranteed design related to the special figure 2 together with the mini effect design and the guaranteed design related to the special figure 1. - 特許庁

Furthermore, as a transition effect, after the stop of the variable effect related to the special figure 2 shifted in such a manner, the right hitting effect is executed, and when the game ball is detected at the combination operation opening (operation opening 68), It is possible to think of an effect pattern such as shifting to a jackpot start demonstration related to the special figure 2 that has been won. In addition, as the jackpot related to the special figure 2, if the hit is a big win in which a production related to a predetermined character is performed, it is also possible to make the character appear in the middle of the variable production related to the special figure 2. be done.

The transition (transition performance) to the variable performance related to the special figure 2 like these is performed without distinction even if the situation of the variable performance related to the special figure 1 is fluctuating or during the design fixed time. It is possible. In addition, not limited to this, it is possible to make the contents of the variable production related to the special figure 2 different between when the situation of the variable production related to the special figure 1 is fluctuating and when the design is fixed. be. Furthermore, the production related to the special figure 2 is not limited to the variable production, and may be, for example, the display of a still image, the appearance of a predetermined character or character, and the like.

The various transition effects as described above are assumed to be performed in all the stages among the various stages related to the special figure 1, or in one part of the stage (for example, 5 out of 8 stages) stage). In addition, in the present embodiment, priority is not provided for the start of variation between special figure 1 and special figure 2, but priority is given to special figure 2 with regard to variation performance. However, the transition effect as exemplified here can also be performed at the time of transition from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1.

Also, unlike the above example, for example, during right-handed hitting on the premise of the game of special figure 2, there is a ball entering the first start winning opening 62, and a big hit according to special figure 1 is generated by the entering ball. can also be assumed. And, in such a case, it is conceivable to suddenly change the effect that has already been executed regarding the special figure 2 to the effect related to the big hit of the special figure 1 as the transition effect.

Furthermore, such a transition (transition effect) from such special figure 2 to the special figure 1 jackpot production is during the design fixed time even if the situation of the variable production related to the special figure 2 is fluctuating. can be done without distinction. In addition, not limited to this, it is also possible to make the contents of the variable production related to the special figure 1 different between when the situation of the variable production related to the special figure 2 is fluctuating and when the design is fixed. be. Furthermore, the production related to the special figure 2 is not limited to the variable production, and may be, for example, the display of a still image, the appearance of a predetermined character or character, and the like.

Also, in the variable effect related to the special figure 2, for example, if the display of an inconspicuous mode such as the mini symbol or the guaranteed symbol described above is performed, as a transition effect, these mini effect symbols related to the special figure 2 It is also possible to leave only the display of the guarantee pattern, and to perform a variable production related to the special figure 1 as another production. In this case, it is possible to display the mini effect symbols and the guaranteed symbols related to the special figure 1 together with the mini effect symbols and the guaranteed symbols related to the special figure 2. - 特許庁
<Production with a limited frequency pattern from the end of the time saving to after the end>

As described above, since the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment employs the parallel lottery game property, for example, when shifting from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, the special figure 1 and the special figure It is conceivable that there may be a transition or polymerization between 2. For example, the last variation (for example, the 100th time-saving variation), which is the final variation during the time saving, is due to the special figure 2, and in the middle of it, the start winning opening of the special figure 1 (first starting winning opening 62). There, it is conceivable that the variation of the special figure 1 during the final variation of the time saving is executed as the 101st variation (immediately after the last variation) from the start of the time saving.

There are various possible causes for such a situation. It is possible to exemplify a case where a prize is won in one starting winning port (first starting winning port 62). In such a case, for example, the variation time related to the 100th variation in time saving is about 10 minutes, and the 101st variation starts while the movable effect member that operated during the 100th variation appeared. A situation may also occur in which the performance effect related to the variation of is impaired.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even in a special situation such as the situation of transition from time saving to normal state, even if the special figure 1 and special figure 2 change with any relationship, in order not to feel uncomfortable has been devised. More specifically, a predetermined limited frequency pattern effect is executed for the next one-time variation (101st variation from the start of time saving) after the last variation during time saving is completed.

That is, during the time saving, the limited frequency table for the time saving is used, and the variable performance suitable for the situation is executed. The limited frequency table used here may be differentiated between the special figures 1 and 2, or may be common to the special figures 1 and 2. As a limited frequency table for time-saving medium use, it is possible to exemplify one in which the change time for the 100th change is set to a relatively short predetermined time (for example, about 13 seconds) as a low-probability time. Furthermore, as a limited frequency table for time saving medium use, as an effect related to the 100th change, the effect of displaying game results such as the number of consecutive games and the number of balls won during time saving is displayed as an “ending effect” related to time saving. and "result production" can be exemplified.

Then, the limited frequency table for the 101st time is referred to for the 101st time variation, which is the timing at which the presentation mode should be switched. Then, as the 101st variable effect, the effect patterns 190a to 190c are displayed in a manner such as shaking related to the aforementioned "temporary stop", which can be selected as the limited frequency pattern effect.

The display mode such as shaking the production patterns 190a to 190c in this manner is intended to adjust the variation production related to the 101st variation to match the variation production related to the 100th variation. Further, effects such as the above-mentioned "result effect" do not greatly change the display mode, and even if it ends in the middle of the given variable time such as 13 seconds, the sense of discomfort given to the player is limited. It is a target.

In addition, here, the 100th variation is related to the special figure 2, and the 101st variation is related to the special figure 1. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the 100th variation may be related to Special Figure 1. In addition, both the 100th and 101st may be variations related to the special figure 2.

As for other limited frequency pattern performances defined in the limited frequency table for the 101st time, it is possible to have different tendencies depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery related to the 101st change is a loss or a big hit. is. For example, in the case of a miss, it is conceivable to use the above-described shake fluctuation or no special effect. Furthermore, as a non-effect mode, it is possible to consider a background image in which only the above-described mini symbol or guarantee symbol image is superimposed.

On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery related to the 101st variation is a big hit, the variation performance (here, result performance, etc.) related to the 100th variation is divided on the image display in the middle of the variation, and a predetermined character is displayed. Those that appear or transition to a predetermined scene can be exemplified.

Furthermore, regarding the variable effect during the time saving, at the end of the time saving, the remaining number of times of the time saving is counted down for each variation. The countdown in this case is performed continuously without distinguishing, for example, even when the variation of the special figure 1 is performed after the variation related to the special figure 2. For example, when the variation of the next special figure 2 is started from the situation where the remaining three times are displayed, the countdown display is switched to the remaining two times. Furthermore, if the variation after this is related to the special figure 1, after the start of the variation related to the special figure 1, the countdown display will be the one remaining.

After that, at the time of the last change (here, the 100th change) during the time saving, it is possible to perform a countdown display of 0 times or to erase the countdown display. Then, for the subsequent 101st variation, the effect pattern is determined using the limited frequency table for the 101st variation as described above.

Also, regarding the relationship between the execution timings of the variable performance related to the special figure 1 and the variable performance related to the special figure 2, various things other than those described above can be considered. That is, as the above example, during the 100th variation production according to special figure 2, the 101st variation production according to special figure 1 is started, but as another example, special figure 1 Or after the 100th variation performance related to the special figure 2 is completed, it can be exemplified that the 101st variation performance related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is started. In addition, below, it demonstrates without distinguishing between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. That is, in the following, the 100th and 101st variations will be described as including the case of both special figures 1 (or all special figures 2).

Then, as described above, the 101st variable performance is started during the 100th variable performance, but the 101st variable performance can be finished during the 100th variable performance.

Further, when the 100th variation time is relatively long, the 101st variation ends and the 102nd variation starts in the middle of the 100th variation. Furthermore, a case can be exemplified in which the 102nd variation ends in the middle of the 100th variation. Such a variation mode can be said to be one in which a plurality of subsequent variations occur during the 100th variation.

Further, when at least one of the 100th variation and the 101st variation results in a big hit, the above-mentioned result production is canceled at the 100th variation. It is possible not to do it.

In addition, regarding the 100th change, which is the final change in the time saving, and the 101st change after that, if there is a big hit with a special figure that is not the main one during the electric sapo or at normal times (irregular jackpot) occurs), the above-mentioned "sudden hit effect" can be used. Then, in this case, while suppressing the amount of various data related to the production by using the above-mentioned production pattern (the production pattern of the transition production), there is a discrepancy in the production between the 100th and 101st changes. It is possible to design the production so that it does not occur. Here, the special figure that is not the main is, for example, the special figure 1 during the electric sapo, and the special figure 2 during the normal time, as described above.
<Production by limited frequency pattern immediately after the end of the jackpot game>

In the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, predetermined limited frequency tables are defined for various types of jackpots and variable effects related to various types of RUSH periods. Then, for the 1st RUSH and 3rd RUSH stages accompanied by an electric support, respective limited frequency tables used only immediately after the end of the jackpot game (here, only one variation) are used. Then, regarding the subsequent fluctuations related to the 1st RUSH and the 3rd RUSH (fluctuations after the second rotation after the end of the jackpot game), for example, as shown in FIG. Over time, each other limited frequency table is used.

The above-described limited frequency table for immediately after the end of the jackpot game (for the first rotation) is provided as a countermeasure for preventing the number of balls to be released from increasing excessively immediately after the shift to time saving. In other words, even during the jackpot game, when the game ball is detected at the operation port 68 and the condition for starting the fluctuation is satisfied, the normal pattern fluctuation is performed. Furthermore, during the jackpot game, both the game related to the special symbol and the game related to the normal symbol are performed at a low probability and in a non-time-saving game state, which is not time-saving.

Therefore, a situation occurs in which the variation of the normal symbols started at the end of the big win game does not end during the big win game and continues even after the big win game ends. For example, when the variation pattern of the selected normal symbol is more than several minutes, such a situation is likely to occur. And, when the lottery result of the normal symbol at this time is hit, the 2-1 start winning opening 63A is opened after the first RUSH (or the third RUSH) is started.

Furthermore, if the launch is continued in such a situation, there is a case where the ball enters the 2-2 start winning opening 63B during the first RUSH (or the third RUSH) game state, and the lottery result is a small hit. be. In addition, based on the lottery result of the normal pattern performed during the big hit game, there is a ball entering the 2-1 start winning opening 63A opened during the 1st RUSH (or 3rd RUSH), and the result of the winning lottery accompanying the entering ball may be a small hit. And, in these cases, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol related to the ball entry is short, the big winning opening 92 is opened relatively immediately, and this opening timing is before the opening of the 2-1 start winning opening 63A. Sometimes it becomes.

Then, when the big winning hole 92 is opened by a small hit, there is a ball entering, and when the winning ball is paid out, the ball released in the electric sapo is the 2-1 starting winning hole 63A or the 2-2 starting winning hole 63A. It is the sum (16 balls or more in this case) of one by entering 63B and the number obtained by a small hit (for example, 15 by one entering ball). Furthermore, it is also possible to consider that during the period from when the obtained ball game ball is shot to when it is consumed, the number of balls obtained during the electric sapo exceeds 100%. As a result, although it is for a limited period of time, unnecessary suspicions may arise in considering appropriate gaming machines.

For this reason, in this embodiment, as described above, a limited frequency table is provided which is limited to one time immediately after the big hit. The variation pattern defined in this limited frequency table has a moderately long variation time (for example, about 13 seconds). This fluctuation time (about 13 seconds here) is about the same as the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation. By doing so, the opening timing of the big winning port 92 is adjusted to be delayed, and even if it is for a limited period or depending on how the situation is perceived, the electric support is possible as much as possible. The number of winning balls inside is kept from exceeding 100%.
<Recommended launch direction notification effect related to small hit RUSH etc.>

Next, a more specific description will be given of a control mode related to a right-handed effect related to a small hit RUSH (second RUSH) or the like. As described above, when a big win occurs or during a small win RUSH, etc., the game state is such that a right-handed hit is performed, and a right-handed performance is executed. In addition, in a gaming machine with a small-hit RUSH game, in addition to the conventional situations such as during a big-hit game, during a variable probability, and during an electric power supply, a player can also receive a small-hit game during a small-hit RUSH. It is possible to increase the number of balls to be put out.

For this reason, if the right-handed shooting effect that notifies the recommended shooting direction and the left-handed shooting effect that is executed when returning to the left-handed shooting situation are not properly performed, the player may lose the benefits that the player should be able to enjoy. . Therefore, in a game machine with a small hit RUSH game, we will conduct a more detailed examination than before, and create a presentation (beating navigation) to indicate the recommended launch direction (recommended launch direction). It is necessary to optimize the content and control of the recommended firing direction notification effect).

Therefore, it is conceivable to provide multiple types of image objects (display objects) for navigation navigation that attract different degrees of attention, and use them properly according to the situation at the timing of game state transition (game state transition timing). be done. Various display objects and navigation displays for presentation using various display objects will be described below, and then a control mode using a combination of various navigation displays for presentation will be described with examples.

First, here, it is considered that the following seven display objects are provided as display objects for the recommended firing direction notification effect.
(1) 1st right-handed arrow image (for constant display during electric sapo): small (2) 2nd right-handed arrow image (for right-handed production at the start of a high-profit jackpot): large (3) 3rd right-handed arrow Image (for the right-handed effect at the start of the low-profit jackpot): Medium (4) Main-linked right-handed arrow image (for display of the right-handed performance that is fully linked with the main indicator): Minimal (5) Main-linked left-handed arrow image ( Interlocking with the main indicator light at the time of short-time exit For left-handed production display): Minimal (6) 1st left-handed arrow image (for left-handed production after short-time exit): Small (7) 2nd left-handed arrow image (warning for display): Large

The above notation in parentheses such as "(for constant display during electric sapo)" and "(for right-handed performance at the start of high-profit jackpot)" outlines the use of each display object. In addition, notations such as “small”, “large”, “medium”, and “extremely small” after the colon (:) indicate the classification of the relative size (size relationship) of each display object. Each display object is selectively used according to the game state and game situation. The manner in which each display object is used will be described below.

First, the recommended shooting direction notification effect is performed when a big win occurs, during a big win game, during an electric sapo, or in an abnormal game state such as during a short time, or when returning from these abnormal game states to a normal game state. and so on. And FIG. 26(a) shows an example of state transition from before occurrence of the big win to immediately after the big win game.

In the state transition example shown in FIG. 26(a), the game state changes in the order of fluctuation, standby, jackpot game (1R to 6R), end demo, as shown from the left in the upper part of the figure. there is Among these game states, in the changing game state, an effect for subsequent right-handed hitting (right-handed effect 1 described later) and an effect before passing through the passing combination operation gate (actuation opening 68) , a start demonstration effect is executed, and an introductory effect is further executed.

Subsequently, in the waiting game state, a right-handed hitting effect 1, which is a predetermined (immediate) recommended shooting direction notification effect (described later), is displayed. Then, as shown in the figure, when the passage of the game ball is detected in the passage combination operation gate (operation port 68) in the standby state, the condition device is operated, and the game shifts to the jackpot game. A performance (jackpot performance) relating to a big hit (here, a 6R big win) is executed from 1R to 6R.

After that, it moves to the game state of the end demo, and depending on the type of jackpot won, the production when the predetermined RUSH state (here, the RUSH state with an electric sapo) continues, or the RUSH state starts (predetermined RUSH state) (production of RUSH continuation or rush) is being executed.
<<Right-hand navigation display 0 for production>>

FIG. 26(b1) shows a situation in which the first right-handed arrow image (hereinafter referred to as 371) of (1) above is displayed. The first right arrow image 371 is a display object for constant display during the power supply as described above. Here, a situation in which the first right-handed arrow image 371 is displayed is referred to as a situation in which the right-handed navigation display 0 for effect is performed.

If the first right-handed arrow image 371 is applied to the state transition example of FIG. is displayed in the upper right corner (upper right corner) of the In addition, the first right-handed arrow image 371 is always continuously displayed even during the electric support period after the jackpot game in the game state (predetermined RUSH state) after the end demonstration.

Here, the various display objects (above (1) to (7)) for informing the recommended shooting direction are all illustrated as arrow images, including the above-described first right-handed arrow image 371. , but not limited to this, and it is possible to employ display objects of various shapes. Also, the sizes and display positions of various display objects may have differences as described later, and are not limited to the examples given here.

In the example of FIG. 26(b1), the first right-handed arrow image 371 is an image in which the direction of the arrow is rightward, and is a display image configured by superimposing multiple layers (composite image of multiple layers). is part of Furthermore, the priority of the display of the first right arrow image 371 is determined by the other layers (background image layer, effect pattern 190a to 190c layer, preview effect layer) that constitute the image for effect. , layers of cut-in images can be exemplified).

Then, the first right arrow image 371 is displayed in front of other layers with relatively low priority, and is entirely or partially hidden by other images that are not for notifying the recommended firing direction. It is designed so that it will not fall off.

To further explain the display timing of the first right-handed arrow image 371, the first right-handed arrow image 371 is displayed in the third state display section 87c (Fig. ) is lit, and is displayed in a predetermined specific situation (here, during the power supply). Also, the first right-handed arrow image 371 is not displayed (hidden) in a situation where the recommended firing direction is left (left-handed).

Further, the first right arrow image 371 is not displayed in a situation where an immediate system (to be described later) recommended shooting direction notification display object is displayed on the effect display device 60 . Further, the display of the first right hitting arrow image 371 by the right hitting navigation display 0 for effect is performed in combination with light emitting effect control of various LEDs for effect.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 26(b1), below (lower stage) the first right-handed arrow image 371, the main interlocked right-handed arrow image of (4) (hereinafter referred to as 374) is displayed. . This main interlocking right-handed arrow image 374 is a display object for a right-handed effect that is interlocked (perfectly interlocked) with the third state display portion 87c (main indicator lamp) of the main control display device 53 from beginning to end.

In other words, the main interlocking right-handed arrow image 374 is provided for the purpose of ensuring the function of visually confirming the state of the third state display portion 87c (main display lamp) on the screen of the effect display device 60. . And unlike the other arrow images (arrow images (1) to (3), (5), and (6) above), the main interlocking right-handed arrow image 374 is to be conspicuous on the screen of the effect display device 60. It's not intended.

Furthermore, the size (display size) of the main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 is smaller than the first right-handed arrow image 371 . Since the size of the first right-handed arrow image 371 is classified as "small" as described above, the size of the main interlocked right-handed arrow image 374 is smaller than "small". Classified as "very small".

Here, the size classifications of "large", "medium", "small", and "very small" are for convenience of explanation, and other classifications (e.g., "very large", "large", "medium", "small") ", etc.) can be used to distinguish the magnitude relationship. Further, when the size of each arrow image is divided more finely than the four types, it is also possible to adopt a more finely divided classification accordingly.

Also, the priority of the display related to the main interlocking right-handed arrow image 374 is higher than the other layers constituting the image for effect, similarly to the first right-handed arrow image 371 . Also, the priority of the display of the main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 is the same as the above-described guarantee symbol.

Here, it is possible to differentiate the display priority between the main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 and the first right-handed arrow image 371 in the right-handed navigation display 0 for effect (FIG. 26(b1)). Then, it is conceivable to set the priority of the main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 higher than that of the first right-handed arrow image 371 . However, the priority is not limited to this, and the priority of the first right-handed arrow image 371 can be set higher than the main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 .
<<Right-hand navigation display for production 1>>

Next, based on FIG. 26(b2), navigation display for presentation in other situations will be described. FIG. 26(b2) shows a display example of the right-hand navigation display 1 for effect. If this right-hand navigation display 1 for effect is applied to the above-described state transition example of FIG. This right-handed navigation display 1 for effect is a type of immediate system recommended firing direction notification effect described above.

In the right-handed navigation display 1 for effect shown in FIG. 26(b2), the second right-handed arrow image (hereinafter referred to as 372) of (2) above is displayed only for a limited period of time during standby. It is designed to be displayed in the central portion of the screen of the display device 60 . The example of state transition in FIG. 26(a) is for a 6R big win, but the effect right-hand navigation display 1 is also displayed for other types of big wins (16R and 2R big wins).

Among the various jackpots, the 16R jackpot is a high-profit jackpot that provides the player with the maximum profit. Also, the 6R big win and the 2R big win are relatively low-profit big wins for the player compared to the 16R big win. The second right-handed arrow image 372 is used for navigation display for right-handed performance after fluctuation stops (during standby) related to high-profit jackpots and low-profit jackpots except for some. .

Here, in this example, instead of performing right-handed navigation display 1 for production for all low-profit jackpots (here, all 6R jackpots and 2R jackpots), some low-profit jackpots (here, 2R normal jackpots ), the right-handed navigation display 1 for production is not performed, and the right-handed navigation display 2 for production (FIG. 26(b3)), which will be described later, is performed.

It should be noted that the maximum number of jackpot games (maximum number of rounds) is set to 10 times (10 rounds), for example, instead of 16 times, and low-profit jackpots include 6-round (6R) jackpots and 2-round (2R) jackpots. Similarly, in the Napachinko game machine, it is possible to execute the effect right-hand navigation display 2 illustrated in FIG.

In the right-handed navigation display 1 for effect shown in FIG. 26(b2), the second right-handed arrow image 372 is an image with an arrow directed to the right, and its size is the same as that of the first right-handed arrow image 371 described above. is larger than This second right-handed arrow image 372 is the largest and most conspicuous among the various other arrow images. Furthermore, the priority of the display of the layer on which the second right-handed arrow image 372 is drawn is higher than the other layers for effect, like the first right-handed arrow image 371 .

In the right hitting navigation display 1 for effect shown in FIG. 26(b2), a main interlocking right hitting arrow image 374 is displayed in the same way as in the right hitting navigation display for effect 0 (FIG. 26(b1)). Here, in the example of FIG. 26(b2), the position of the main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 is the same as in the example of FIG. You may make it different by shifting to a position or a low value.

Further explaining the display timing of the second right-handed arrow image 372, the second right-handed arrow image 372 stops fluctuating in the case of other big hits except for some low-profit big wins (here, 2R normal big wins). It will be displayed in the later waiting game state. Therefore, the right-hand navigation display 1 for production is displayed in a limited situation for a shorter period than the right-hand navigation display 0 for production, prior to the right-hand navigation display 0 for production. can.

Here, the display of the second right-handed arrow image 372 by the right-handed navigation display 1 for effect continues (continuously) until the game ball passes through the combination operation gate (operation opening 68). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to intermittently display the second right-handed arrow image 372 within a predetermined display period (here, during standby).

Furthermore, in a situation where the second right-handed arrow image 372 of the maximum size is displayed, it is possible to perform a predetermined voice output representing the situation. As the voice output at this time, for example, it is conceivable to adopt a "right-handed" voice using the voice of a character (character voice) appearing in the production.

In this way, by displaying the second right-handed arrow image 372 larger than the first right-handed arrow image 371 (for constant display during electric power sapo) 371, the player can On the other hand, it is possible to more clearly prompt the game ball to pass through the combination operation gate (operation port 68).
<<Right-hand navigation display for production 2>>

Next, based on FIG. 26(b3), the right-handed navigation display 2 for performance that is executed at the time of some low-profit jackpots (here, 2R normal jackpots) will be described. In the right-handed navigation display 2 for effect shown in FIG. 26(b3), the above-mentioned third right-handed arrow image (hereinafter referred to as 373) is displayed on the effect display device 60 only for a limited period during standby. It is displayed in the middle part of the right side of the screen in .

In this right-handed navigation display 2 for effect, the third right-handed arrow image 373 is an image in which the direction of the arrow is rightward, and its length (horizontal size) is the same as that of the first right-handed arrow described above. It is longer than the image 371 and shorter than the second right-handed arrow image 372 . Furthermore, the thickness of the third hit-to-right arrow image 373 is about the same as the first hit-to-right arrow image 371 described above, and is thinner than the second hit-to-right arrow image 372 .

The third right-handed arrow image 373 has a medium size compared to the first right-handed arrow image 371 and the second right-handed arrow image 372 described above. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 26(b3), an image of characters "Please hit to the right" is attached to the portion immediately below the third right-handed arrow image 373. In the example of FIG. Furthermore, the priority of the display of the layer on which the third right-handed arrow image 373 (including a character image; hereinafter omitted) is drawn is higher than that of other layers for presentation, similar to the first right-handed arrow image 371 and the like. is also higher.

In the right-hand navigation display 2 for production shown in FIG. 26(b3), similar to the right-hand navigation display 0 for production (FIG. 26(b1)) and the right-hand navigation display 1 for production (FIG. 26(b2)), A main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 is displayed. Here, in the example of FIG. 26(b3), the position of the main interlocking right-handed hitting arrow image 374 is the same as the example of the right-handed navigation display 1 for production in FIG. 26(b2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the main interlocking right-handed arrow image 374 may be different from both the right-handed navigation display 0 for production and the right-handed navigation display 1 for production.

Further explaining the display timing of the third right-handed arrow image 373, the third right-handed arrow image 373 is displayed in the case of a 2R normal jackpot. When the 2R normal jackpot is won, an effect of losing the battle is displayed behind the third right-handed arrow image 373 and the main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 (not shown). Furthermore, the third right-handed arrow image 373 has a change stop after being changed, and even if a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed after being on standby, the game is played at the combination operation gate (operation opening 68). It is displayed when the passage of the ball is not detected.

In addition, the display of the third right-handed arrow image 373 in the right-handed navigation display 2 for effect continues (continuously) until the game ball passes through the combination operation gate (operation opening 68). However, not limited to this, it is also possible to intermittently display the third right-handed arrow image 373 within a predetermined display period (here, during standby).

In addition, after the jackpot game in which the right-handed navigation display 2 for effect is executed is finished, the jackpot probability is low and the game state without electric support is entered. Then, in the state of transition to this game state, as will be described later, a navigation display (left-handed navigation display 2 for effect shown in FIG. 27(c)) recommending left-handed hitting is executed. When left-handed navigation display is performed, it is possible to perform a predetermined voice output (output of character voice of "left-handed", etc.).

In this way, in the case of a specific low-profit big win, by displaying the medium-sized third right-handed hitting arrow image 373, when the big win occurs, it is possible to perform a recommended shooting direction notification performance that matches the nature of the big win. Become. Further, even if the third right-handed arrow image 373 is made smaller than the second right-handed arrow image 372 used at the time of another big hit, by combining the character display, the deterioration of the reporting ability due to the reduced size can be prevented. can compensate.
<<Right-hand navigation display for production 3>>

Next, the right-hand navigation display 3 for effect will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b4). This right hitting navigation display 3 for performance is provided as a navigation display when a small hit occurs. The directing right-handed navigation display 3 does not conspicuously display the navigation, but displays only the above-described extremely small main-linked right-handed arrow image 374 as an arrow image for navigation (navigation).

As described above, this main interlocking right arrow image 374 is interlocked (completely interlocked) with the third state display section 87c (main indicator lamp) in the main control display device 53, and the state of the third state display section 87c is produced. This is so that it can be confirmed on the screen of the display device 60 . The priority of the display relating to the main interlocking right-handed arrow image 374 of the right-handed navigation display 3 for effect is the same as the guarantee symbol as described above.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 26(b4), the display position of the main interlocking right-hand hitting arrow image 374 is the same as the other right-hand hitting navigation display for effect.
<<Right-hand navigation display for production 4>>

Next, the right-hand navigation display 4 for effect will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). This right-handed navigation display 4 for effect is provided as a warning navigation display when left-handed hitting is performed in a situation where right-handed hitting is required. In this right-handed navigation display 4 for production, similarly to the right-handed navigation display 1 for production (FIG. 26(b2)), a second right-handed arrow image 372 of a large size and a main interlocking right-handed arrow of a very small size are displayed. Image 374 is displayed.

The second right-handed arrow image 372 is displayed in the center of the screen of the effect display device 60, but since the effect patterns 190a to 190c (not shown) may be changing, the effect patterns 190a to 190c are completely displayed. are not hidden, and at least some of the production patterns 190a to 190c are displayed so as to be visible. Here, in order to make the production patterns 190a to 190c visible, the transparency of the second right-handed arrow image 372 may be determined, and the second right-handed arrow image 372 may be made transparent. It is possible.

To further explain the display timing of the second right-handed arrow image 372, the second right-handed arrow image 372 is displayed when the game ball wins a predetermined number of times (here, two times) in the left starting opening (first starting winning opening 62). be started. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (here, 6.5 seconds) elapses after the second winning is detected in the left starting opening (first starting winning opening 62), the second right-handed arrow image 372 is erased.

Further, when a predetermined condition (in this case, the game ball is detected at the operation port 68) is established while the second right-handed arrow image 372 is displayed, the start winning associated with the display of the second right-handed arrow image 372 is established. The count value of the number of times is reset and returns to 0. Furthermore, the count of the number of starting winnings related to the second right-handed arrow image 372 is performed during a predetermined part of the rush state or when a predetermined effect (for example, the above-mentioned "standard exceeding effect") is being executed. It is conceivable to do so.

In addition, the priority of the display of the layer on which the second right-handed arrow image 372 is drawn is higher than other layers for presentation, like the first right-handed arrow image 371 and the like. Furthermore, in the case of the right-handed navigation display 4 for production, in the situation where the second right-handed arrow image 372 is displayed, for example, a sound (system voice) similar to that used for abnormality notification etc. ” or outputting a warning sound such as an electronic sound.
<< Left-hand navigation display 1 for production >>

Next, based on FIG. 27(b), left-hand navigation display 1 for effect will be described. In this left-handed navigation display 1 for production, when the time-saving end production is performed with the end of the time-saving, the above-mentioned main interlocking left-handed arrow image (hereinafter referred to as 375) is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds). ).

More specifically, the main interlocking left-handed arrow image 375 indicates a gaming state in which the command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is recommended to hit right-handed at the start of the first variation when the time is short. , the display starts when the left-hand hit changes to the one that indicates the recommended gaming state. Then, when the main interlocking left-handed arrow image 375 is displayed, the state of the third state display section 87c (main indicator lamp) in the main control display device 53 becomes a state indicating left-handed hitting (extinguishing state). there is

In addition, when the time-saving end effect ends during the display time (here, 6 seconds) of the main interlocking left-handed arrow image 375, the main interlocked left-handed arrow image 375 is displayed even after the time-saving end effect. be.

The left-handed navigation display 1 for presentation does not make the navigation display conspicuous, but displays only a very small main interlocked left-handed arrow image 375 as an arrow image for display navigation. The priority of the display related to the main interlocking left-handed arrow image 375 is higher than other layers for effect, like the above-described first right-handed arrow image 371 and the like. Here, it is possible to set the display priority of the main interlocking left-handed arrow image 375 to be the same as the guarantee symbol, as with the main interlocked right-handed arrow image 374 described above.

Further, the display position of the main interlocking left-handed arrow image 375 on the effect display device 60 is the same as the above-described right-handed navigation display for effect.
<< left-hand navigation display for production 2 >>

Next, the left-hand navigation display 2 for effect will be described with reference to FIG. 27(c). In this left-handed navigation display 2 for effect, when the final fluctuation stops for a short period of time, the first left-handed arrow image (hereinafter referred to as 376) starts to be displayed, and is displayed for a predetermined time (here, 6 seconds). ) is displayed continuously. Further, while the first left-handed arrow image 376 is being displayed, the character voice outputs "left-handed" only once (one shot), for example. Furthermore, the priority of the display related to the first left shot arrow image 376 is higher than other layers for effect, like the above-described first right shot arrow image 371 and the like.

Also, the display position of the first left-handed arrow image 376 on the effect display device 60 is the same as the first right-handed arrow image 371 described above.
<< Left-hand navigation display for production 3 >>

Next, based on FIG. 27(d), left-hand navigation display 3 for effect will be described. This left-handed navigation display 3 for effect is provided as a warning navigation display when a right-handed ball is hit in a situation where a left-handed ball should be hit. In this left-handed navigation display 4 for effect, a large-sized second left-handed arrow image 377 and the above-described extremely small-sized main interlocked left-handed arrow image 375 are displayed.

The second left-handed arrow image 377 is displayed in the center of the screen of the effect display device 60, but since the effect patterns 190a to 190c (not shown) may be changing, the effect patterns 190a to 190c are completely displayed. are not hidden, and at least some of the production patterns 190a to 190c are displayed so as to be visible. Here, in order to make the production patterns 190a to 190c visible, the transparency of the second left-handed arrow image 377 may be determined, and the second left-handed arrow image 377 may be made transparent. It is possible.

The display timing of the second left-handed arrow image 377 will be further explained. times) Display starts when you win. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (here, 6.5 seconds) elapses after the second winning is detected in the 2-2 start winning opening 63B, the second left-handed arrow image 377 is erased.

Further, when the third game ball wins in the 2-2 start winning hole 63B while the second left-handed arrow image 377 is being displayed, the display time of the second left-handed arrow image 377 is displayed. The display of the second left arrow image 377 continues until the maximum time (here, 10 seconds) added with the extension time is reached.

Furthermore, when a predetermined condition (here, the game ball is detected at the first start winning opening 62) is established while the second left-handed arrow image 377 is being displayed, the second left-handed arrow image 377 is displayed. The count value of the number of start wins is reset and returns to 0.

Also, the layer on which the second left-handed arrow image 377 is drawn has a higher display priority than the other layers for presentation, like the first right-handed arrow image 371 and the like. Furthermore, in the case of left-handed navigation display 3 for production, in the situation where the second left-handed arrow image 377 is displayed, for example, it is possible to output "left-handed" by system voice, or by electronic sound. It is conceivable to output a warning sound.

Further, the warning by the second left-handed arrow image 377 is not issued in the situation where the above-described left-handed navigation display 2 for effect is being performed. Further, during the start demonstration effect in the above-described changing game state (FIG. 26(a), etc.), the warning by the second left-handed arrow image 377 is not performed.

Further, the display position of the main interlocking left-handed arrow image 375 on the effect display device 60 is the same as the left-handed navigation display 1 for effect described above (FIG. 27(b)).
<< Example of control mode of recommended launch notification effect >>

Next, an example of the control mode of the recommended firing notification effect performed using the above-described various navigation displays as appropriate will be described. First, at the start of the final variation of the time saving (here, the 100th variation from the start of the time saving), the electric sapo ends, and the above-described left-handed navigation display 1 for production (FIG. 27(b)) is executed. Then, as the recommended firing direction notification effect, only a very small main-linked left-hand shot arrow image 375 is displayed. Also, the effect display device 60 executes an ending effect (also referred to as a result effect) related to the ball being released from the big hit to the time saving.

In such a situation that should be left-handed, even if right-handed is played and winning is detected at the above-mentioned 2-2 start winning opening 63B, a large size second left for warning The hitting arrow image 377 (FIG. 27(d)) is not added, and as shown in FIG. 27(a3), only the minimal main linked left hitting arrow image 375 continues to be displayed.

Even if the fluctuation of the 100th rotation (last fluctuation) described above is in either case of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, after the fluctuation of the 100th rotation stops, the first left hitting arrow image 376 (Fig. 27 (c) ), and this left-handed navigation display 2 for effect continues for a predetermined period (here, 6 seconds). Even during the period of this left-handed navigation display 2 for effect, right-handed hitting is performed and even if winning is detected at the above-mentioned 2-2 start winning opening 63B, switching to the second left-handed arrow image 377 for warning is performed. is not performed, and the left-hand navigation display 2 for presentation is maintained.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the left-handed navigation display is repeatedly redisplayed. In other words, the state of change immediately after the end of the time reduction, such as left-handed navigation display 2 for effect (Fig. 27(c)), is immediately after the player has obtained more balls than usual, and the right-handed player is It can be said that the player feels better than if the recommended situation did not occur.

For this reason, if a game ball hit to the right is accidentally detected, repeatedly recommending hitting to the left or emphasizing the navigation display may spoil the player's mood. Therefore, in such a situation, a warning is intentionally not issued so as to prevent the player from being offended by the warning.

Also, after the period of left-handed navigation display 2 for effect (FIG. 27(c)), if there are a predetermined number (two balls in this case) or more of balls entering the 2-2 start winning hole 63B, a warning effect is given. Left-hand navigation display 3 (FIG. 27(d)) is displayed for a predetermined time (here, 6.5 seconds). Furthermore, if a ball enters the 2-2 start winning opening 63B during this left-hand navigation display 3 for production, the display period of the left-hand navigation display 3 for production will be the longest time (here, 10 seconds). extended until it reaches

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(a), the start demonstration effect is executed during the variation in the case of a big hit, and the passage of the game ball through the combination operation gate (operation opening 68) is detected during standby. Then, it shifts to a big hit game. During the production of the start demonstration, even if a right-handed game ball is detected, no warning is given by switching to the left-handed navigation display 3 for production (FIG. 27(d)). This prevents the player from being offended by the warning when the player accidentally starts to hit the ball to the right early.
<<Effects of the invention related to the recommended firing direction notification effect>>

As described above, by defining specific modes of various display objects, rendering navigation displays using various display objects, and recommended firing notification rendering, for example, different modes for situations in which right-handed (or left-handed) strikes should be performed. Therefore, it is possible to give a detailed notification of the recommended firing direction according to the game situation. Furthermore, since the form of the recommended firing direction notification is changed according to the amount of profit for the player (for example, FIG. 26(b2) and FIG. 26(b3)), this also affects the game situation. It is possible to perform detailed recommended firing direction notification according to the target.
<Adjustment between specific effect and button effect>

A specific effect (hereinafter referred to as "specific effect") may be executed during fluctuations such as the above-mentioned symbol stock effect and zone notice, but as described above, the symbol stock effect is the above-mentioned It is also possible to execute in combination with a change production. As a specific aspect thereof, for example, as shown in FIGS. 24(a1) and (a2), the effect symbol "7" appears and the stock effect is executed.

In the illustration of FIG. 24, the illustration is simplified so as not to complicate the explanation. In the latter situation, a predetermined effect is executed. The predetermined effect executed here can have a content that arouses expectations that the stock effect will develop into more advantageous content for the player.

FIG. 28 shows an example of state transitions connected by arrows when a stock effect develops into a subsequent effect. In the display example shown in the uppermost part of FIG. 28, as shown in the left end part of the figure, after the left effect pattern of "7" (reference numerals omitted) appears, the display example in the lower part is simplified by notation of letters. As shown, the stock rendition has started.

Furthermore, as shown in the lower display example, the stock symbols (366, etc.) accumulated at that time will be used (stock release situation), and after that, as shown in the lower display example A change effect (specific effect) is being executed. This change effect uses the same background image as the background image (including background video) when releasing the stock, and the background image has a predetermined character etc. of a predetermined size (such as a size that occupies more than half of the screen). It is conceivable to form by superimposing with

In other words, it is conceivable that the change effect is formed by freezing the background image when the stock is released and superimposing a predetermined character or the like on the background image. In addition, it is conceivable to cause a character or the like appearing in the change effect to perform a plurality of types of actions, and to provide a different change effect for each type of action. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the content of subsequent effects (“another effect” to be described later) differs for each type of change effect. Furthermore, for some types of superimposed characters and the like, it is conceivable to produce a mode in which the background image is not frozen.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 28, after the change effect described above, another type of effect (another effect) preferable to the player is developed. In other words, the change effect is used as a strong notice (strong notice) that functions to change (make up) the effect to be desirable for the player.

Further, when such a change effect is executed, a button effect such as that described above (such as making the pattern of the operation button 22 appear) may be executed. That is, when the change effect is executed, the separately determined button effect may have already been executed. Then, when the change effect and the button effect are executed in parallel at the same time, the respective display objects are superimposed and the effect can become complicated and difficult for the player to understand. In addition, it is conceivable that the change effect is mistakenly recognized as the result of the operation of the operation button 22 performed by the player along with the button effect, and the intended effect cannot be exhibited.

Therefore, in order to prevent the effect from becoming difficult for the player to understand, it is possible to give priority to the change effect and not to execute the button effect when the change effect and the button effect overlap. Then, it is conceivable to invalidate the button effect, and in the control of the sub-main board 301, if the button effect is being executed, the process related to the button effect is terminated.

As a control mode for "not executing the button effect" described above, on the liquid crystal display, an image related to the change effect is displayed in front of the layer in which the image related to the button effect (such as the pattern of the operation button 22) is drawn. It is conceivable to overlap layers on which images are drawn so that images related to button effects cannot be visually recognized. In addition, after hiding the image related to the button effect, for image control, for example, the effect image is not updated (image update) to make the pattern of the operation button 22 appear to shine white (freeze). )Is possible.

In addition, while hiding the image related to the button effect as a whole, it is possible to terminate the effective period of the operation button 22 and disable the operation of the operation button 22 in terms of effect control. In addition, when an effect pattern is adopted in which an image of the operation button 22 and a moving image such as an indicator indicating the remaining time related to the valid period of the button operation are combined, the image related to the indicator is not updated. (freeze).

Furthermore, when a change effect is performed, it is conceivable that the determination of the button effect is not performed, or even if the determination is made, the determination is invalidated. In this case, light decoration and sound output can be performed by emitting light in a pattern for emphasizing a change effect or by outputting a speaker.

Execution of the change effect and the button effect can be determined by separate effect determination processing on the sub-main board 301 . Then, in this example, when execution of the change effect is determined, it is determined whether or not the button effect is being performed. Stop and execute the change production. Also, if it is confirmed by a flag (button effect flag) that the execution of the button effect has been determined but has not yet started, the button effect is canceled (aborted). It is also possible to adopt

Also, regarding the relationship between the change effect and the button effect, it is assumed that when the change effect is executed, the button operation has not yet been performed during the button effect, and the button operation has already been performed. be able to. Of these, in a situation where the button operation has not yet been performed, as described above, while hiding the image related to the button effect, the effective period of the operation button 22 is terminated and the image related to the indicator is not updated. It is possible to

On the other hand, in the situation where the button operation has already been performed, it is assumed that the button effect has shifted to the state after the operation, or the effect has developed to be advantageous to the player. be. In these cases as well, it is possible to superimpose the image related to the change effect from the front on the image related to the button effect after transition and the image of the effect after development so that they cannot be visually recognized. Also in these cases, it is conceivable that the image is not updated for the effect associated with the button operation from the viewpoint of image control.

In addition, if the production after development is such as to make the movable production member jump out in front of the production display device 60, the subsequent operation of the movable production member is canceled or not performed. It is conceivable to return the production member to the non-operating position.

By doing so, even if the performance develops in favor of the player, the change performance is prioritized, and the performance developed along with the button operation prevents the change performance from becoming difficult to see. Further, it is possible to prevent the specific effect (here, the change effect) from being erroneously recognized as the result of the operation of the operation button 22 performed by the player accompanying the button effect.

In addition, a lottery for multiple types of effects (here, stock effects and button effects) is executed, and while determining whether or not to execute and the content, depending on the development of one effect, the progress of the other effect can be stopped. . Then, it is possible to adjust the balance of multiple types appropriately, and by the control mode of disabling the effect from the middle of the effect, the effect to be emphasized (here, the change effect) and the effect to be adjusted (here, the button effect) ) can coexist with

It should be noted that not only the control mode described above, for example, depending on the type of effect after development accompanying button operation, the effect after development is prioritized over the change effect so that the effect after development can be visually recognized. It is also conceivable that Then, as the type of performance after development that takes precedence over the change performance, there can be exemplified one in which the reliability of the big win is higher than that of the change performance.

Further, for example, in a situation where the movable effect member has already protruded forward of the effect display device 60, it is conceivable to give priority to the developed effect over the change effect. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute the change effect preferentially in terms of the display effect in a state in which the movable effect member protrudes forward of the effect display device 60. - 特許庁

Also, here, the button effects are adjusted so that the change effects are not difficult to see, but not limited to this, it is also possible to adjust the button effects so that effects other than the change effects are not difficult to see. For example, when the stock effect is performed, it is possible to hide the button effect.

Furthermore, with respect to the above-mentioned specific zone notice, only red or higher notice effects have been described, but for example, only red or higher notice effects may appear during the above-described change effects. Further, in addition to the presentation effect in which only red or more objects appear as the advance notice effect, another effect may be added, or the effect may be replaced to provide another effect.

In this case, as an effect to be added or replaced, it is conceivable to employ a timer effect capable of performing a subtraction or addition effect. As the timer effect (first timer effect), for example, a digital display image such as "99.99" appears, and the time until the next effect (here, "different effect" in FIG. 28) is executed is calculated backwards. It is conceivable that Then, based on the obtained calculation result, the remaining time until transition to the effect is displayed, and when the timer display reaches "00.00", the process progresses to "another effect".

Furthermore, for example, if the time until the next effect (here, "another effect") is executed exceeds the maximum value that can be displayed by the timer (here, 99.99 seconds), the following display will be displayed. It is conceivable to carry out First, the subtraction of the number of seconds according to the integer value from 100 seconds is performed sequentially. Then, after 99 seconds have elapsed, the integer value portion becomes "00", and after that, in the display of the decimal value portion, a countdown display from ".99" may be performed, for example, every few seconds.

Also, a timer effect (second timer effect) different from this may be provided, and this second timer effect may be a premium effect with higher reliability of big win than the above-described first timer effect. Furthermore, as a specific aspect of the second timer effect, it is possible to think of stopping the timer value at "77.77". Then, this second timer effect is executed only when the time until the transition to the next effect is a second value (e.g., 80 seconds) greater than the fixed display value (here, "77.77"). , etc. can also be considered.
<Accessory Control Mode>

As illustrated in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the effect display device 60 described above includes performance symbols 190a to 190c, mini symbols (symbols displayed in the reduced effect symbol display area 361), and the like. displayed in a manner appropriate to the situation. Also, in addition to these, the above-described guaranteed symbols and the like are displayed according to the fluctuation situation of the special symbols. These various symbols are displayed according to the game state, and in order for the various symbols to exhibit their functions, it is desirable to maintain the visibility of the various symbols as much as possible.

However, in a situation where the movable production member protrudes in front of the production display device 60, various patterns such as the production patterns 190a to 190c and mini patterns are hidden by the movable production member, and the various patterns cannot be visually recognized. Alternatively, the visibility of various patterns may be degraded. Among these patterns, the guaranteed patterns should be placed in a position where they are not hidden even if any of the movable production members appear, and they should be changed according to the movable production members that appear. explained.

However, if a display area (always visible area) is provided on the display screen of the effect display device 60 that is not hidden even if any movable effect member appears, the shape of the movable effect member and the movement path (movement trajectory) In determining , it is necessary to prevent the movable production member from overlapping the visible area at all times. Therefore, the effect using the movable effect member is restricted by the constantly visible area, and as a result, the degree of freedom of the effect is reduced. Such restrictions on performance may occur not only in guaranteed symbols but also in performance symbols 190a to 190c and mini symbols.

Further, as described above, an additional display body (such as a sub-liquid crystal) forming part of the effect display device 60 may be used as a movable effect member. By displaying various patterns on the display body positioned at the front facing the player, it may be possible to prevent the various patterns from being hidden by the movable effect member. However, if the mini symbols and guaranteed symbols are always displayed on the display body that functions as a movable production member, the entire display body cannot be hidden in normal times (normal times), and the display is not possible. Production using the body will also be restricted.

Here, as the guaranteed symbol, for example, a fixed display and a variable display of single-digit numbers from 0 to 9 are performed. A thing showing the lottery result about special figure 2) etc. can be illustrated. Then, as the relationship between the numerical values 0 to 1 and the lottery result of the special figure, for example, 0 indicates a different lottery result, 1 to 8 indicate a combination of corresponding three-digit production patterns, and 9 indicates a small hit. Further, as the size and size of the display area related to the guarantee pattern, a size of about several millimeters square and displayed at a predetermined position (constant position) on the edge of the screen can be exemplified.

Therefore, by paying attention to the operation timing of the movable production member and devising the operation timing of the movable production member, it is conceivable that the display positions and shapes of various patterns are not restricted by the movable production member. For example, based on the time of fluctuation stop (fixed stop here) of special figure 1 or special figure 2, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the timing when the fluctuation is scheduled to stop, the movable production member is the production display device 60 Control so that it does not appear before .

As a control to prevent the appearance of the movable effect member, for example, in the sub-main board 301, the remaining time is counted or calculated for the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the remaining time is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) If it is determined that the point has been reached, the sub-main board 301 may restrict the movement of the movable effect member.

As a specific control mode for doing this, for example, in a situation where the execution of the effect pattern that operates the movable effect member is determined, at the timing when the remaining time of the fluctuation reaches the predetermined time, If the movable production member is in the state before the operation, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable production member by canceling the execution of the planned production pattern.

More specifically, for example, whether or not to execute an effect pattern for operating the movable effect member is determined by a lottery (driving lottery) at the start of fluctuation in the sub-main board 301, and the drive command for the movable effect member is Executed just before the drive timing. Therefore, even if the actuation of the movable effect member is once determined by the drive lottery, the execution of the planned effect pattern is canceled by determining whether or not to execute the actuation until the movable effect member is driven. It is possible to

Furthermore, as an example of a situation in which the movable production member operates, a situation in which a button production prompting the operation of the operation button 22 is executed can be cited. Regarding such a button effect, it is conceivable not to execute the button effect if the remaining time for the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined time. Even if the effect pattern with the button effect is determined, the button effect can be canceled.

In addition, when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a button effect in the middle of the variable effect, a control mode that does not execute this lottery, or a control mode that cancels the lottery even if it wins. can think.

Even when the movable effect member is not put out in front of the screen of the effect display device 60, the movable effect member is not left to operate on the spot, but is moved outside the screen of the effect display device 60 in a predetermined manner. , rotation, light emission, etc.). In addition, even during the period in which the movable effect member is not put out in front of the screen of the effect display device 60, in order to try to return to a normal state when an error related to the movable effect member occurs and is detected. It is conceivable that the return operation (retry operation) of is enabled.

Further, in the case of the retry operation, it is conceivable to operate the movable effect member while allowing the screen of the effect display device 60 to overlap. Alternatively, even if it is a retry operation, it is conceivable that the movable effect member is not allowed to overlap the screen of the effect display device 60 during the change.

In addition, as another control mode, even if the movable effect member is in operation, if the remaining time of fluctuation reaches a predetermined time, the movable effect member does not reach the effect display device 60, and the operation is interrupted (or It is also possible to consider a control mode such as changing). In this case, as a control mode for middle stage (or change) of the operation, for example, if the movable production member is in operation and reaches in front of the production display device 60, the operation from there to the middle stage (or change) to move (retreat) the movable effect member to the outside of the screen of the effect display device 60, or return it to the initial position.

As in the various control modes described above, by restricting the movement of the movable effect member when the fluctuation time is still remaining, the movable effect member can be prevented from operating until the fluctuation stops. .

In addition, when the movable performance member has already started to operate, it is possible to move (retreat) the movable performance member to the outside of the screen of the performance display device 60 and secure the time for it. In particular, it can be considered that the retry operation and return operation in most cases are completed by securing a sufficient time such as 30 seconds. By doing so, even when the movable production member operates, it is possible to prevent the movable production member from stopping in front of the screen when the fluctuation stops.

Further, in the various control modes described above, the motion pattern of the movable effect member is set so that it does not overlap the screen of the effect display device 60 after a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) before the fluctuation stop. Realization is also possible by designing. Furthermore, it is also possible to design the operation patterns of the movable effect members so that none of them exceed a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds).

By doing so, during the variation of the special figure 1 or special figure 2, it is possible to provide a period (operation prohibition period) in which the movable production member is not operated. Then, it is possible to reliably secure a period during which various patterns are not hidden by the movable effect member, and it is possible to always keep good visibility of the various patterns.

In particular, in the game state where the jackpot probability in the parallel lottery specification is low probability and the electric sapo is not accompanied (no low probability electric sapo), the variation of the special symbol (here, the variation of the special figure 2) is positively directed to the player. In practice, it is conceivable to prevent the user from perceiving (not to notify). However, if there is a possibility that even a part of the screen of the effect display device 60 is hidden by the movable effect member when the special figure 2 stops fluctuating, the visibility of the special figure 2 display itself is Is not good, it is possible to distinguish whether the fluctuation has stopped while being hidden by the movable production member, and it is also possible that the visibility of the special figure 2 is determined to be insufficient.

For this reason, as described here, after a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) before the movable effect member stops changing, the display area of the effect display device 60 is not hidden, so that the special figure 2 is visually recognized. It is possible to prevent the judgment that the quality is insufficient. Such a way of thinking of the control mode for the special figure 2, considering the relationship between the movable production member and the special figure 2, it can be said that the movable production member is not operated.

Further, as described above, when a period (operation prohibited period) is provided in which the movable effect member is not operated, the component elements of the effect can be reduced accordingly, and the effect can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to compensate for the liveliness of the effect by performing the effect display based on the predetermined image data during the operation prohibited period.
<Recovery screen control when power is restored>

As described above, when power is restored, various power failure recovery commands (power failure recovery commands) are transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301, and on the sub-side controlled by the sub-main board 301, Effect return processing and return control (effect return processing and effect return control) are performed according to the game progress at the time of power failure. Since the pachinko game machine 10 having the function of small winning RUSH can be in various game states, it is necessary to perform return processing and return control according to various game progress conditions for proper control. is necessary.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 10 having the function of small winning RUSH, the recommended firing direction may be the game area on the right side in normal times, and it is necessary to finely optimize the power failure return to normal times. . In addition, since the game features a parallel lottery that does not set the priority of the special figures 1 and 2, it is possible to optimize the power failure recovery related to the parallel lottery by assuming various situations. is necessary.

Furthermore, if all information relating to the state of the game is transmitted one by one from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 as a command (recovery command from power failure) at the time of recovery from power failure, the game status can be recovered in a wider variety of situations. can be done. However, it is also assumed that the information to be sent as a power failure recovery command may be selected, and it is also possible to consider what kind of command should be sent when power failure is restored and what state should be used for power failure recovery. considered necessary.
<<Recovery from power outage during special figure 1 fluctuation with low probability and low base>>

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 10 having parallel lottery specifications, the jackpot probability is low, the electric sapo is not operating, and the low base state (hereinafter referred to as "low probability Regarding special figure 1 in "low base", etc.), when power failure occurs in the middle of fluctuation (special 1 fluctuation), when power is restored, backed up probability state information (low probability) information), information on the operating status of the electric sapo (information on whether or not the electric sapo is in progress), information on the type of specific game state (information on whether or not the small hit is in RUSH), etc. Send a power outage return command Then, the power failure recovery (screen recovery) is performed in a display mode suitable for the situation.

In this case, the effect display device 60 at the time of power failure recovery does not display a mode (recovery screen) for explaining the recovery situation such as "preparing screen" (FIG. 29(a)), which will be described later. , display in the form of high-speed fluctuation according to Special Figure 1, and recover from power failure. And, it is conceivable that the return with such a variable display is performed only when the power is turned off during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the low probability low base state.

Also, when power is restored in a similar situation, it is conceivable that the power is restored in the display mode during stop (during fixed stop) of special figure 1. It is possible to employ any of these return modes. However, it is possible to recover from a power failure in a manner that is closer to the situation at the time of the power failure by performing a power failure recovery in the display mode during fluctuation, and the situation at the time of the power failure and the situation at the time of the power failure recovery is possible. It is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring.
<<Recovery from power outage during special figure fluctuation when hitting right>>

Subsequently, if a power outage occurs during the right-handed special figure fluctuation, the power failure is restored based on the backed up information (recommended firing direction information, information on whether the special figure is changing, etc.) A command is sent, for example, as shown in FIG. 29A, a display object indicating a game situation such as a navigation display for right-handed effects is displayed (explained) as a return situation such as "preparing screen". It is conceivable to display together with the display object. Also, on the return screen related to the special figure fluctuation during this right-handed hit, the color behind the display objects for various situation explanations (navigation display for right-handed production, "screen preparation" display, etc.) (background color ) may be, for example, white or blue.

By doing so, it is possible to quickly prompt the player to hit to the right. Then, the main board 102 transmits to the sub-main board 301 a minimum amount of information such as information indicating that power is being restored and information indicating that the game state is one in which hitting to the right is recommended. It is possible to allow the player to enjoy the benefits of the game with a winning RUSH without deteriorating it as much as possible. Here, in the example of FIG. 29(a), the message "Please continue the game" is written together below the character display of "Preparing screen".
<<Recovery from a power outage during a big hit>>

Subsequently, even at the time of power failure recovery when power failure occurs during a big win (during a big win game, etc.), a power failure recovery command is transmitted based on the backed up information indicating that the big win is in progress, for example. Similar to the case shown in FIG. 29(a), it is conceivable to display (together with) a navigation display for a right-handed effect along with a display object such as "preparing screen". Furthermore, in this case, it is conceivable to use a special background (special background during the big win) for power failure recovery during the big win. For example, a yellow background may be used as the special background during the big hit. Also, for the display of the special background during the big win, it is sufficient if there is at least one piece of information (power-off recovery command) indicating power-off recovery related to the big win.

In addition, in the event of a power outage in the situation (standby situation) waiting for the game ball to pass through the combination operation gate (operation port 68) for shifting to the jackpot game, the backed up information ( Based on the big win information, condition device non-activation information, etc.), when the screen returns, there is a display (a display to the effect that it is waiting) that it is in a state of waiting for passage through the interlocking operation gate (operation opening 68). Instead, it is conceivable to display a minimum amount of information as shown in FIG. 29(a) using the above-mentioned special background during the big hit (such as the above-mentioned yellow background).

In other words, even in the case of a big hit, or even in the case of a big hit, it is possible to use the similar recovery screen in most (major parts such as character display) to the situation of time saving and small win RUSH. It should be noted that, not limited to this, the effect that the jackpot game is in progress, the fact that it is waiting state (standby state) to pass through the combination operation gate (operation opening 68) is displayed, and the return in the right-hand hitting state other than these is performed. It is also possible to make parts other than the screen and the background different.

In addition, there are various game states including the game state described above in the game state related to the big win. The display at the time of recovery from the power interruption occurring in various game states can be as follows.
＜＜Round display during jackpot＞＞

First, regarding the display related to the rounds during the jackpot game (the round display that displays the number of rounds, the number of counts, etc.), it is conceivable that the number of rounds is not displayed when the screen is restored even if there is a display when the power is turned off. The same is true for other round information such as the number of counts during the round. In these cases, the display of the situation explanation exemplified in FIG. 29(a) (navigation display for right-handed effects, "preparing screen" display, etc.) is performed along with the special background during the big hit (such as the above-mentioned yellow background). As a result, it is possible to perform a display at the time of recovery from power failure with a minimum amount of information.
<<Display of the pattern during the jackpot>>

Furthermore, regarding the display of the pattern during the big win showing what type (numerical value) the performance pattern displayed at the time of the big win was, even if it is displayed when the power is turned off, it is not displayed when the screen is restored. can be considered. Also in this case, when the screen returns, it is conceivable to display a minimum amount of information as shown in FIG.
<< display of winning game ball count during jackpot >>

In addition, regarding the display of the acquired ball count, which indicates the calculation result of the number of game balls (acquired balls) acquired during the jackpot game, it is not displayed when the screen returns, and the count of the acquired ball count after that is displayed. It is also conceivable that the display will not be performed until the end of the round. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the acquired ball count is not displayed in rounds after the current round. Also in this case, when the screen returns, it is conceivable to display a minimum amount of information as shown in FIG.
<<Display of recovery from power failure while waiting to pass through the interlocking operation gate>>

Regarding power failure recovery while waiting for the game ball to pass through the combination pass gate (actuation port 68), the minimum information display as illustrated in FIG. operation information, etc.), it is conceivable to carry out with the above-mentioned special background during the big hit. In addition, it is also possible to display information indicating that the player is waiting for the official currency gate.
<< Display of power failure recovery during jackpot end demonstration >>

When power failure occurs during the production (hit end demo) at the end of the final round of the jackpot game, when the screen returns, the minimum information display as illustrated in FIG. (Information at the end of the winning demonstration, etc.), it is conceivable to carry out with a dedicated background during the big winning. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, when the screen returns, it is also possible to display a demonstration of the end of the big win.
<<Return of production pattern>>

Concerning the power failure recovery of the performance symbols 190a to 190c, it is conceivable to perform the screen restoration using the performance symbols corresponding to the type of the special symbols (special figure 1 or special figure 2) on the main board 102. Here, the performance symbols displayed at the time of power failure are not backed up, and based on the command (power failure recovery command) transmitted from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301 at the time of power failure recovery, the performance symbols are displayed. It is possible to return to the screen using .
<< Display of the number of consecutive houses and the number of acquired game balls >>

The number of consecutive wins and the number of acquired game balls are backed up on the side of the sub-main board 301 when power is cut off, and the backed-up information (information on the number of consecutive games, information on the number of acquired game balls, etc.) is performed when the screen is restored. Based on this, it is conceivable to transmit a predetermined power failure recovery command and display the number of consecutive villas displayed at the time of power failure. By backing up data on the number of acquired game balls, etc., even if there is a power failure during a performance involving the display of the number of acquired game balls, such as the above-mentioned “performance beyond the standard”, the performance will be resumed after the power is restored. You can resume from the middle.
<<Regarding the combination of the navigation display for the right-handed effect and the display object that shows the return status>>

As described above, when the screen is restored in a predetermined case among a plurality of situations in which the power is restored, for example, as shown in FIG. By using together with a display object indicating the recovery status such as "preparing screen", it is possible to display the recovery screen according to the game status at the time of power failure recovery. With a minimum command (recovery command from power failure) from the main substrate 102, it is possible to display an optimum power failure recovery screen for various game situations.

Furthermore, when the power is restored in multiple situations related to the big hit, the navigation display for the right-handed effect can be displayed together with the display object indicating the recovery status such as "preparing the screen", so that multiple situations can be restored. A common screen return can be performed for each. In addition, the types and number of commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 can be reduced when power failure is restored to the jackpot state, thereby simplifying the data processing related to screen restoration.

Here, although the details will be described later, when the setting change function (also referred to as "setting function") is provided as described above, the command related to the setting at the time of power failure recovery is also sent from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. sent to. However, it is desirable to quickly complete the processing when the power is restored, and the functions of the CPU 501 of the main board 102 are restricted, so it is not desirable to increase the number of commands transmitted when the power is restored.

For this reason, as described above, when returning to a common gaming situation from a power failure, by sharing the display contents at the time of screen recovery, the screen from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 at the time of recovery from a power failure can be displayed. It is possible to reduce the types of commands and the number of commands for return. Then, it is possible to secure room for command transmission related to the setting change function without greatly increasing (or reducing) the load of command transmission on the main board 102 .
<Supplementary matters related to the production by the limited frequency pattern from the end of the time saving to after the end>

First, <Production by limited frequency pattern from the end of time saving to after the end> was explained. The production from the end of the time saving to after the end can also be called "production of time saving omission". Furthermore, in the previous explanation, we also touched on mini symbols and guaranteed symbols.

As described above, when the parallel lottery related to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is adopted, the main (main) special figure and decorative pattern (production pattern) are switched according to the game state. Then, the variation period of the special figure 1 and the variation period of the special figure 2 can overlap, and regardless of the presence or absence of the reservation, switching between the main special figure and the non-main special figure is performed. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 that employs parallel lottery, it is desirable to design the mini symbols and guaranteed symbols in consideration of the state switching.

Furthermore, regarding the fact that there are main special symbols and non-main special symbols depending on the game state, for example, it is possible to consider a situation where the game state changes without going through the big win. And as such a situation, as mentioned above, it is possible to think of a situation in which time saving ends and shifts to a non-working time saving state (situation of working time saving omission).

In addition, when adopting the so-called cut probability change (ST), which is a type of game that limits the period such as probability change depending on the number of fluctuations of the special figure, as a situation related to the situation of short time, ST It is possible to think of a situation in which it terminates and moves to a non-ST state (ST exit situation). In addition, at the time of time saving omission, presence or absence of reservation of special figure 1 or special figure 2, or depending on conditions such as the order of occurrence of the reservation, it is considered that there can be optimum display control.

Below, various situations that can be assumed as situations of short working hours are classified into respective cases, and display control in various classifications will be described. In addition, the various classifications described below include the same items as described in the section <Production by limited frequency pattern from the end of time saving to after the end> described above in order to comprehensively show related matters. It is a thing.

30(a) to (c) show display examples of mini symbols on the effect display device 60. FIG. In addition, Figures 31 (a) to (c), Figures 32 (a) to (c), and Figures 33 (a) to (c) are special symbols (special 1 or special 2) and the schematic content (variation example) of the corresponding effect display are exemplified by timing charts.

Among these figures, first, in FIG. 30(a), a reduced effect symbol display area 361a for special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left edge of the display screen (display area) of the effect display device 60. FIG. In the example of FIG. 30(a), a mini symbol "246" is displayed in the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a. Here, in FIGS. 30(a) to (c), the rendering patterns (190a to 190c) and other image objects are omitted so as not to complicate the drawing.

In addition, in FIG. 30(b), a reduced effect symbol display area 361b for special figure 2 is displayed in the lower left edge of the display screen of the effect display device 60. As shown in FIG. Then, in the example of FIG. 30(b), the mini symbol "135" is displayed in the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b. Furthermore, in FIG. 30(c), both the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a and the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b are displayed at the same time.

In the screen display examples described above (FIGS. 8, 22(b), (c), and 24), the reduced effect symbol display area 361 is shown in the lower right part of the drawing. However, here, both the reduced effect symbol display area 361a for the special figure 1 and the reduced effect symbol display area 361b for the special figure 2 may be displayed at the same time (Fig. 30(c)). A special figure 1 reduced performance symbol display area 361a and a special figure 2 reduced performance symbol display area 361b are separately arranged at different positions of the upper left edge and the lower left edge.
<<First case: Last change in special figure 2>>

Then, in the variation example shown in FIG. 31 (a), as shown from the left side of the figure, the last to the last (here, the 99th) special figure variation (hereinafter referred to as "last-previous variation") during the short period of time ) is performed by special figure 2, which is the main special symbol during time saving, and the last (here, the 100th time) special figure variation (last variation) is also performed by special figure 2. Furthermore, during the last special figure fluctuation (last fluctuation by special figure 2), in terms of production, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the END screen (such as the ending production and result production mentioned above) will be a limited frequency pattern production. ) is displayed.

At the start of this last fluctuation, the electric support period has ended. Furthermore, in terms of performance, the mini symbols in the special figure 2 reduced performance symbol display area 361b (Fig. 30(c)) are displayed so as to be visible, and the mini symbols related to the special figure 2 are displayed in a variable manner. . Variation of the mini symbol according to this special figure 2 continues independently from the variation before that (before the 99th time), as shown in FIG. 30(b).

Also, during this last variation, the mini symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361a for the special figure 1 change from being invisible to being visible as shown in FIG. 30(c). That is, in the variation example of FIG. 31(a), when the last variation is started, the mini symbol of the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a appears on the screen, and the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b mini-symbol is displayed. At this time, the mini symbols in the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a are visible, but are in a state of stopping fluctuation.

Here, in FIGS. 31 to 33, the special figure 1 is shown with an unfilled square (□), and the special figure 2 is shown with a filled square (▪).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the middle of the last variation of the special figure 2 (here, at the end), the display of the above-mentioned END screen ends and the normal screen is restored. The normal screen at this time indicates that the game has shifted to a normal game state without time saving. Immediately after returning to the normal screen (at the beginning of the return), the last variation due to the special figure 2 has not yet ended, and after returning to the normal screen, the last variation due to the special figure 2 has ended.

In addition, even after returning to the normal screen, the display of the reduced effect symbol display area 361a for special figure 1 continues, and in the example of FIG. Both the reduced effect symbol display area 361a for 1 and the reduced effect symbol display area 361b for special figure 2 continue to be displayed while the mini symbol is stopped (FIG. 30(c)).

After the time saving ends and the normal game state is restored, the special figure 1 becomes the main game, and the special figure 2 becomes the non-main game (secondary game). Therefore, after the time saving, the mini pattern related to the special figure 2 is erased so as not to be visible. Then, in the display screen, only the main reduced performance symbol display region 361a for special figure 1 is left out of the two reduced performance symbol display regions 361a and 361b.

At this time, it is possible to consider a situation in which a hold related to special figure 2 has occurred and a situation in which it has not occurred. And, when the hold has occurred, after the fluctuation stop of the special figure 2 related to the last fluctuation, when a predetermined design fixed time (for example, about 500 ms) passes, it is sent from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 Based on the sub-main command, the mini symbol related to special figure 2 is erased.

Also, if no hold has occurred, after the fluctuation stop of the special figure 2 related to the last fluctuation, when a predetermined waiting time (for example, about 500 ms to less than 1000 ms) elapses, the mini symbol related to the special figure 2 erased. Here, if there is no suspension, it is also possible to transmit a command (sub-main command) indicating that the waiting time has come from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub-board 302 .

In the sub-sub-board 302, it is also possible to determine the timing based on the command (sub-main command) from the sub-main board 301 and erase the special figure 2 mini symbol.

By performing the processing as described above, the baton touch between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be performed smoothly. In other words, the last variation at the time of short-time omission is the timing when the main pattern shifts, but since the parallel lottery of special figures 1 and 2 is adopted, during the last variation and before and after the last variation The fluctuating special design is not something that is naturally determined to be either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.

For this reason, at the time of the last variation, by displaying both the mini symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 and the mini figure corresponding to the special figure 2, before the last variation in which the mini symbol related to the special figure 2 is displayed From the fluctuation of , through the last fluctuation, to the subsequent fluctuation (normal fluctuation) in which the mini symbol related to special figure 1 is displayed, it is possible to have continuity in production, and from the last fluctuation to the subsequent fluctuation In addition, it is possible to respond flexibly in terms of production, and at the end of the time saving, it is possible to smoothly perform the baton touch of the main special pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Also, based on the last fluctuation, both the special 1 mini design and the special 2 mini design are displayed, and by deleting the special 2 mini design at the time of the change immediately after that, the special 2 mini design And, it is possible to minimize the period during which both mini symbols of special figure 1 are displayed in the screen. Then, it is possible to prevent the mini symbols from being hidden by the movable effect member as much as possible.

In other words, if the period during which both the special figure 1 mini symbol and the special figure 2 mini symbol are displayed is long, when the movable effect member appears, the mini symbol is hidden by the movable effect member, and the mini symbol is displayed. Visibility is more likely to be degraded. However, by shortening the period in which both the mini-symbol of special figure 1 and the mini-symbol of special figure 2 are displayed, the area occupied by the mini-symbol on the screen is reduced, and the movable that appears in front of the screen It is possible to prevent the displayed mini-pattern from being hidden by the performance member and the visibility of the mini-pattern from being impaired.

Also, in the same manner as described above, in order to prevent the movable effect member from obstructing the visual recognition of the mini symbol, the display of the mini symbol is provided at a position where it is not hidden even if any movable effect member appears. It is conceivable to perform it at a position or change it according to the movable production member that appears. However, for these reasons, the effect using the movable effect member is restricted by the display area (always visible area) for making the mini pattern always visible, and as a result, the degree of freedom of the effect is reduced.

However, as in the first case (FIG. 31(a)) described here, or as in the case after the second case described later, when the time is short, the mini symbol of special figure 1 and the special figure By minimizing the period during which both the 2 mini symbols are displayed according to the situation, the visibility of the displayed mini symbols may be impaired by the appearing movable effect member. can be prevented.

In addition, if the visibility of such a mini-symbol is not taken into consideration, both the mini-symbol of the special figure 1 and the mini-symbol of the special figure 2 may be always displayed. Then, at the time of the time saving, the display like the above-mentioned END screen is continued even if there is no suspension from the last change to the change after the time saving (here, the 101st change, which is the change immediately after the last). It is conceivable to display

However, by constantly displaying mini-symbols that are not used in the game state at that time, it is conceivable that the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, according to the game state, such as the first case described here and the second case and later cases (FIGS. 31(b) to 32(c)) described later, the mini symbol of special figure 1 and the special It is desirable to properly determine the display period related to the mini-symbol in FIG.
<<Second case: special figure 1 fluctuation during last fluctuation in special figure 2>>

Various cases different from the first case described above will be described below. Various cases described below, like the first case, are intended to optimize the display period related to the mini-symbol of special figure 1 and the mini-symbol of special figure 2 in relation to the time saving time. Regarding the following various cases, descriptions of the same configurations and effects of the invention as those of the first case will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 31(b) shows a variation example (second case) when special figure 1 starts to vary during the last variation in special figure 2. In the example of FIG. 31 (b), the variation just before the last (here, the 99th variation) is performed by the main special figure 2 during the time saving, and the last variation (here, the 100th time) is also performed by the special figure 2. there is

At the start of the last variation by the special figure 2, the time saving ends, and the END screen is displayed in the same way as the example of the above-described first case (FIG. 31(a)). Furthermore, in the middle of the last variation, a start winning prize related to special figure 1 occurs, and special figure 1 has started to vary.

During the last variation due to special figure 2, as in the example of the first case (FIG. 31 (a)) described above, the special figure 1 reduced production design display area 361a and the special figure 2 reduced production design display area 361b are displayed on the effect display device 60 (FIG. 30(c)). Therefore, in the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a, the variation display of the mini symbol is started from the middle of the last variation. And the variation of this special figure 1 is the 101st variation from the start of the time saving.

In the example of FIG. 31(b), the fluctuation (fluctuation after the last) related to the special figure 1 has stopped after the last fluctuation related to the special figure 2 has stopped. Furthermore, after the last variation due to special figure 2 is completed, depending on whether or not there is a hold related to special figure 2, a predetermined design fixed time (eg, about 500 ms) and the above-mentioned waiting time (eg, about 500 ms to less than 1000 ms) , the mini-symbols in the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b are erased so as not to be visible, leaving only the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a (FIG. 30(a)).
<< Third case: Last change in special figure 1 during special figure 2 fluctuation >>

FIG. 31(c) shows a variation example (third case) when the last variation by special figure 1 is started during the variation of special figure 2. Here, the description of the same parts as the variation example shown in FIG. 31(a) will be omitted as appropriate. In the example of FIG. 31 (c), the variation just before the last (here, the 99th variation) is performed by the main special figure 2 during the time saving, but the last variation (here, the 100th time) is performed by the special figure 1. It is

Furthermore, the last variation according to the special figure 1 is started in the middle (middle stage) of the variation immediately before the last, and is stopped after the variation immediately before the last is completed. Also, at the start of the last variation due to this special figure 1, the electric support period has ended. In this example, the display of the aforementioned END screen, which is an effect, is started in time with the start of the last variation, as shown in the lower part of the figure. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the END screen may be displayed from the middle of the last variation due to the special figure 1.

When the last variation by the special figure 1 is started, the display of the mini symbol of the reduced effect symbol display area 361a for the special figure 1 is started. Furthermore, at the end of the last variation, the display of the END screen ends, and the normal screen as described above is restored. The mini symbols in the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a stop changing immediately after returning to the normal screen. That is, immediately after returning to the normal screen (at the beginning of the return), the last variation due to special figure 1 has not yet ended, and after returning to the normal screen, the last variation due to special figure 1 has ended.

Also, in this example, after the last variation due to special figure 1 is completed, depending on whether or not there is a hold related to special figure 2, a predetermined symbol fixed time (for example, about 500ms) or the above-mentioned waiting time (for example, more than 500ms ~ About less than 1000 ms) passes, the mini symbols in the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b are erased so as not to be visible, leaving only the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a (Fig. 30(a)). .
<< Fourth case: Last change in special figure 1 during special figure 2 variation long >>

In FIG. 32 (a), the variation of special figure 2 is performed as a variation just before the last, and during the variation of this special figure 2, the last variation due to special figure 1 is started, and an example of variation in the case where it is further ended (second 4 cases) are shown. Here, the description of the same portions as the variation examples shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(c) will be omitted as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 32 (a), the variation just before the last (here, the 99th variation) is performed by the main special figure 2 during the time saving, but the last variation (here, the 100th time) is performed by the special figure 1. It is Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2, which is the fluctuation just before the last, is relatively long. And, during the fluctuation just before the last, there is a start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1, which is the last fluctuation, and the last fluctuation is finished.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 32(a), the display of the above-mentioned END screen, which is an effect, is started in time with the start of the last variation by the special figure 1, as shown in the lower part of the figure. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the END screen may be displayed from the middle of the last variation due to the special figure 1.

Also, in this example, after the last variation by special figure 1 ends, when the last last variation by special figure 2 ends, depending on the presence or absence of suspension related to special figure 2, a predetermined design fixed time (for example, about 500ms) Or, when the above-mentioned waiting time (for example, about 500 ms to less than 1000 ms) has passed, the mini-symbol of the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b is erased so as not to be visible, and the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a is left (FIG. 30(a)).
<< 5th case: Special figure 1 SP reach during special figure 2 fluctuation long >>

In FIG. 32 (b), the variation of special figure 2 is performed as a variation just before the last, and during the variation of this special figure 2, the last variation by special figure 1, and then a predetermined number of consecutive times (here twice ) shows a variation example (fifth case) when variation related to special figure 1 is performed. Here, descriptions of the same portions as those of the variation examples (first case and fourth case) shown in FIGS. 31A and 32A will be omitted as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 32 (b), the variation just before the last (here, the 99th variation) is performed by the main special figure 2 during the time saving, but the last variation (here, the 100th time) is performed by the special figure 1. It is Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2, which is the fluctuation just before the last, is relatively long. And, during the fluctuation just before the last, there is a start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1, which is the last fluctuation, and the last fluctuation is finished. In addition, two subsequent special figure 1 fluctuations (here, the 101st and 102nd fluctuations) have been performed without ending the fluctuation just before the last

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 32(b), the display of the above-mentioned END screen, which is an effect, is started in time with the start of the last variation by the special figure 1, as shown in the lower part of the figure. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the END screen may be displayed from the middle of the last variation due to the special figure 1.

Also, in this example, while the variation just before the last by special figure 2 is performed, the 101st variation and the 102nd variation (both special figures 1) are continuously performed. The 102nd variation by special figure 1 is performed based on the variation pattern of SP (special) reach. And, in the middle of the 102nd fluctuation due to special figure 1, the fluctuation just before the last due to special figure 2 (99th fluctuation) has ended.

Furthermore, in this example, when the last-before fluctuation due to special figure 2 ends, depending on whether or not there is a hold related to special figure 2, a predetermined symbol fixed time (for example, about 500ms) or the above-mentioned waiting time (for example, more than 500ms ~ About less than 1000ms) passes, the mini-symbol of the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b is erased so as not to be visible, leaving only the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a. (Fig. 30(a))
<< 6th case: Last change in special figure 1 during fluctuation per special figure 2 >>

In Figure 32 (c), the variation of the hit of the special figure 2 is performed as the variation just before the last, and during the variation of the hit of this special figure 2, the last variation due to the special figure 1 is started and is finished. A variation example (sixth case) is shown. Here, descriptions of the same portions as those of the variation examples (first case and fourth case) shown in FIGS. 31A and 32A will be omitted as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 32 (c), the variation just before the last (here, the 99th variation) is performed by the main special figure 2 during the time saving, but the last variation (here, the 100th time) is performed by the special figure 1. It is Furthermore, the variation pattern of the special figure 2, which is the variation just before the last, corresponds to the battle effect that becomes a big hit. And, during the fluctuation just before the last, there is a start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1, which is the last fluctuation, and the last fluctuation is finished.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 32(c), the END screen as described above is not displayed. In addition, the mini symbols in the special figure 2 reduced performance symbol display area 361b continue to vary during the variation just before the last, and continue to vary until the variation just before the last is finished and the performance of generating a big hit is started. Also, even if the last variation of the special figure 1 is started, the mini symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361a for the special figure 1 will not be visible.

That is, in this sixth case, the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub board 302 perform special effects (mini symbol display for special figure 1, END screen display, etc.) for the variation of special figure 1, which is the last variation. I try not to Then, the fluctuation display of the mini symbol for special figure 2 is executed until the fluctuation stop of the big hit fluctuation (last fluctuation in special figure 1). It can be said that such a display control mode assumes that the sub-main board 301 (and the sub-sub-board 302) does not have the last variation due to the special figure 1.
<< 7th case: last change in special figure 1 >>

FIG. 33(a) shows a variation example (seventh case) in which the last variation in the special figure 1 is performed after the variation just before the last in the special figure 2. FIG. Here, descriptions of the same portions as those of the variation examples (first case and sixth case) shown in FIGS. In the example of FIG. 33 (a), the variation just before the last (here the 99th variation) is performed by the special figure 2 that is the main during the time saving, and the last variation (here the 100th time) is the main during the time saving It is done by special figure 1 that does not work.

Furthermore, when the fluctuation of the fluctuation just before the last ends, following this, the special figure 1 has started to fluctuate. During the last variation, both the reduced effect symbol display area 361a for the special figure 1 and the reduced effect symbol display area 361b for the special figure 2 are displayed on the effect display device 60 (FIG. 30(c)). The mini-symbols in the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a are variably displayed, and the mini-symbols in the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 33(a), the display of the above-mentioned END screen, which is an effect, is started in time with the start of the last variation by the special figure 1, as shown in the lower part of the figure. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the END screen may be displayed from the middle of the last variation due to the special figure 1.

Furthermore, at the end of the last variation, the display of the END screen ends, and the normal screen as described above is restored. The mini symbols in the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a stop changing immediately after returning to the normal screen. Furthermore, in this example, when the last variation due to special figure 1 ends, depending on whether or not there is a hold related to special figure 2, a predetermined symbol fixed time (for example, about 500 ms) or the above-mentioned waiting time (for example, more than 500 ms to 1000 ms Less than about) passes, the mini-symbol of the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b is erased so as not to be visible, leaving only the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a (Fig. 30(a)).
<< 8th case: special figure 2 fluctuation during last fluctuation in special figure 1 >>

In Figure 33 (b), after the last variation in the special figure 2, the last variation in the special figure 1 is performed, and during this last variation, the 101st variation due to the special figure 2 is started 8 shows a variation example (eighth case). Here, descriptions of the same portions as those of the variation examples (first case and seventh case) shown in FIGS. 31A and 33A are omitted as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 33 (b), similar to the example of FIG. 33 (a), the variation just before the last (here the 99th variation) is performed by the special figure 2, and the last variation (here the 100th) is the special figure 1. Furthermore, when the fluctuation just before the last ends, the last fluctuation by special figure 1 is started following this, and the 101st fluctuation by special figure 2 is started during this last fluctuation (here in the middle stage).

Furthermore, in this example, when the last-before fluctuation due to special figure 2 ends, depending on whether or not there is a hold related to special figure 2, a predetermined symbol fixed time (for example, about 500ms) or the above-mentioned waiting time (for example, more than 500ms ~ About less than 1000 ms) passes, the mini symbols in the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b are erased so as not to be visible, leaving only the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a (Fig. 30(a)). .
<< 9th case: special figure 2 last fluctuation during last fluctuation in special figure 1 >>

FIG. 33(c) shows a variation example (ninth case) in which the last variation in the special figure 2 is performed in the middle of the variation just before the last in the special figure 1. Here, description of the same parts as in the variation example (first case) shown in FIG. 31A will be omitted as appropriate. In the example of FIG. 33(c), the variation immediately before the last (here, the 99th variation) is performed by the special figure 1, and the last variation (here, the 100th variation) is performed by the special figure 2. Furthermore, in the middle of the fluctuation just before the last, the special figure 2 has started to fluctuate.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 33(c), the display of the above-mentioned END screen, which is an effect, is started in time with the start of the last variation by the special figure 2, as shown in the lower part of the figure. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the END screen may be displayed from the middle of the last variation due to the special figure 1.

Furthermore, at the end of the last variation, the display of the END screen ends, and the normal screen as described above is restored. The mini symbols in the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b stop fluctuating immediately after returning to the normal screen.

Also, the mini symbols in the special figure 1 reduced performance symbol display area 361a are stopped in the middle of the last variation by the special figure 2. Furthermore, in this example, when the last variation due to special figure 2 ends, depending on whether or not there is a hold related to special figure 2, a predetermined symbol fixed time (eg, about 500 ms) or the above-mentioned waiting time (eg, over 500 ms to 1000 ms Less than about) passes, the mini-symbol of the special figure 2 reduced effect symbol display area 361b is erased so as not to be visible, leaving only the special figure 1 reduced effect symbol display area 361a (Fig. 30(a)).
<<Limited frequency pattern production at the time of change immediately after the last change>>

In the above-mentioned <Production by limited frequency pattern from the end of time saving to after the end>, if at least one of the 100th variation and the 101st variation is a big hit, the 100th It has been explained that the above-mentioned result effect is not performed due to the fluctuation related to.

However, if the above-mentioned END screen is displayed at the 100th time, which is the last change, and the 101st change, which is the change immediately after the last change, is a big hit, during the display of the END screen, the 101st change will be displayed. It is conceivable that no notice of the big hit is made and so-called no notice is given. Such unannounced big hit fluctuations can be called "accident fluctuations" or the like.

Furthermore, the 101st fluctuation (change immediately after the last fluctuation), which is unannounced, can be considered as follows. For example, it is assumed that the variation time for the 101st variation is appropriately short. The reason why the fluctuation time for the 101st fluctuation is appropriately short is that if the fluctuation for the 101st fluctuation is made to be an unannounced fluctuation and the fluctuation time for the 101st fluctuation is excessively lengthened, This is because after the end of the variation (the 100th variation) in which the END screen is displayed, the period of no notice becomes excessively long, and the presentation effect may be reduced.

Also, it is conceivable to make the variation time for the 101st variation longer than the variation time for the 100th variation. The reason why the variation time for the 101st variation is set longer than the variation time for the 100th variation is that if the variation time for the 101st variation is excessively short, the END screen (during the 100th variation ), the 101st variation ends and the 102nd variation starts, making it difficult to maintain the continuity of the presentation as much as possible.
<Anti-fraud measures related to small hit RUSH>

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the small winning RUSH (second RUSH) game feature, the game state is diverse, and the winning frequency at various start winning holes varies greatly depending on the game state.

In addition, conventionally, various frauds related to starting prizes such as fishing balls, plastic plates, nail bending, etc. have been known. There is also a pachinko game machine designed to perform detection. In the pachinko gaming machine 10 having a small winning RUSH game property, it is desirable to take countermeasures corresponding to various game states and winning frequencies in order to prevent fraud related to starting winnings.

Furthermore, in the case of a small winning RUSH, a small winning is likely to occur, but the player tries to increase the number of balls by entering the big winning opening 92 by performing an irregular shot accompanied by a so-called stopping shot. It is also possible. As an irregular launching mode, during the small hit RUSH, the timing of launching the game ball is planned, the game ball avoids passing through the operation opening 68, and the electric chew (2-1 start winning opening) is used as much as possible. 63A) is prevented from opening. Also, it is conceivable to avoid the timing when the electric chew (2-1 start winning opening 63A) opens and to avoid winning the open electric chew (2-1 starting winning opening 63A) as much as possible. .

For these reasons, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 having a small winning RUSH (second RUSH) game, it is desirable to deal with the irregular shooting of game balls at the time of the small winning.

Therefore, it is conceivable to appropriately determine the monitoring conditions for various devices used at the time of a small win, and perform monitoring according to the game situation and the use of the target device. For example, the number of winning balls per predetermined time is monitored for the winning device (here, the big winning opening 92) that is controlled to open and close in the small winning game. Then, when a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls) are detected in the big winning hole 92 for one small hit, a predetermined game effect lamp (for example, a predetermined LED provided in the game machine frame 11) is turned on. It is conceivable to flash the display in a certain manner and output a predetermined warning sound from the speaker 21 .

In general, the opening pattern of the winning opening controlled to be opened and closed in the small winning game is limited to a short opening time of, for example, about 1.8 seconds from the viewpoint of performing a proper game. Then, in the small winning game, even when opening is performed multiple times or multiple rounds, the total opening time (total opening time) is set to, for example, about 1.8 seconds.

In addition, one or two balls can be considered as the standard winning number in one small-hit game. For this reason, a standard winning number is used as a reference number, and if a number sufficiently larger than the reference number (in this case, 5 balls) is detected, it will be reported as fraudulent. .

Furthermore, when a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls) are again detected in the big winning hole 92 while the game effect lamp is blinking as described above, the game effect lamp is turned on longer than the above blinking mode. It is made to blink (also referred to as "solid light emission") at lighting intervals and output a predetermined warning sound. By doing so, a more emphatic warning can be given to a fraudulent act that continues ignoring the warning. The warning sound at this time can be different from the warning sound output by the detection of the first five balls.

It should be noted that the extent to which a ball enters the big winning hole 92 varies depending on factors such as the arrangement, shape, and structure of the big winning hole 92 . For this reason, the number of game balls to be determined as abnormal is not limited to 5 balls, but may be, for example, 6 or more or 4 or less.

Next, let us consider the error detection conditions for the 2-2 start winning opening 63B described above. As for the 2-2nd starting prize-winning slot 63B, the mode of monitoring can be divided into short-term monitoring and long-term monitoring. Among these, short-time monitoring is to monitor the number of winning balls (which can also be considered as a winning rate or a winning interval) in a relatively short period of time. Also, the long-term monitoring is to monitor the number of incoming balls over a relatively long period of time.

Regarding the above-mentioned short-time monitoring, for example, regardless of the presence or absence of an electric sapo, if a predetermined number (for example, 6 balls) of incoming balls are detected in a relatively short predetermined time (for example, 0.4 seconds), it is considered abnormal. judge. Then, as described above, the abnormality is notified by optical output or sound output.

On the other hand, regarding long-term monitoring, for example, in a game state without an electrical support, if a predetermined number (for example, 20 balls) of balls are detected in a relatively long predetermined time period (for example, 7 seconds), it is determined to be abnormal. . Furthermore, in a game state with an electric sapo, if a predetermined number (for example, 20 balls) of balls are detected in a predetermined time (for example, 45 seconds) that is several times longer, it is determined as abnormal.

During the electric sapo that is not during the small hit RUSH (variable probability and no electric sapo state), the frequency of winning the electric chew (2-1 start winning opening 63A) increases as described above. The 2-2 start winning opening 63B and the big winning opening 92, which are arranged in the lower part, rarely win a prize if a normal game is played. Therefore, by monitoring the state of ball entry by providing a time that matches the conditions of the 2-2 start winning opening 63B and the big winning opening 92, it is possible to detect an error suitable for the characteristics of the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraud such as intentionally causing a large number of game balls to flow down toward the 2-2 start winning opening 63B or the big winning opening 92 during the power support.
<Setting change function and command for power failure recovery during jackpot>

As described in the section <Recovery screen control at the time of recovery from power failure>, by transmitting the power failure recovery command from the main to the sub, the screen is recovered on the sub side (Fig. 29 (a), etc.). . However, since the pachinko game machine 10 is equipped with a setting change function, a corresponding amount of data storage and a storage area are required.

Therefore, it is desirable to reduce the number of commands sent from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 when power is restored, and to secure the data storage amount and storage area for the setting change function. And even if the predetermined commands at the time of power failure recovery are reduced and they are not transmitted (targeted to be non-transmission), it is necessary to define related technical matters so that the sub side can appropriately control the production. There is

Based on this concept, a predetermined type of power failure recovery command among the power failure recovery commands at power-on (power failure recovery commands) is deleted from the transmission targets, thereby simplifying the power failure recovery process. In addition, since a big win usually does not occur frequently, it is considered to be rare that the situation in which power failure recovery is performed is during a big win. For this reason, among the commands at the time of power failure recovery, the command for power failure recovery during the big win is made non-transmission target and simplified, so that the player does not feel a great sense of discomfort, and the performance at the time of power failure recovery is achieved. It is considered possible to perform

Therefore, the following commands were first considered as objects to be transmitted at the time of recovery from power failure during a big hit, and some of the commands were deleted from the power failure recovery command. These commands are described below.

First, as shown in the order of transmission in FIG. Return hit state, power failure recovery pattern 1 state, power failure recovery pattern 2 state, pattern 1 condition device start effect, pattern 2 condition device start effect, probability change number 1 command, probability change number 2 command, winning (ball winning) ) Easy state count 1 1st command Winning (entering a ball) Easy state count 1 2nd command Effect count 1 Effect selection state 1 Symbol 1 character effect Symbol 2 character effect Handle information (firing position designation) Symbol There are 1 per end demo, 2 per symbol end demo, firing position designation effect, error A, special symbol 1 memory number, special symbol 2 memory number.

Among these, communication check 1 and communication check 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. In addition, the game stop information is intended to indicate a situation in which a game stop error occurs due to circumstances such as a setting value abnormality or magnet detection. Therefore, the contents of these commands always indicate that the system is normal.

The band lamp information is a command for displaying model specifications (spec information such as sweet digital) on the effect display device 60 on the liquid crystal. The belt lamp information is used as information for identifying the specifications of the models adopting the same motif manufactured by the same manufacturer.

The setting value indicates information related to the setting value at that time. The power failure recovery hit state provides information on the hit state at the time of power failure recovery. Further, the power failure recovery symbol 1 state indicates information of the symbol 1 (special figure 1) at the time of power failure recovery, and the power failure recovery symbol 2 status indicates the symbol 2 at the time of power failure recovery (special figure 2). information.

The symbol 1 condition device start effect indicates information regarding the presence or absence of the passage of the game ball in the combination operation gate for symbol 1 (special figure 1). Regarding 2), it shows information on whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination operation gate. Further, the first command of the probability fluctuation count is a first command regarding the probability fluctuation count indicated by using the first command and the second command, and the second command of the probability fluctuation count is the second command for indicating the probability fluctuation count. is a command.

The winning (ball winning) easy state count 1 first command is the first command for the winning (ball winning) easy state count shown using the first command and the second command, and is the easy winning (ball winning) state count. The 1 second command is a second command for indicating the number of winning (ball winning) easy states. Further, the effect number 1 indicates information regarding the number of times of effect, and the effect selection state 1 indicates information regarding the selection state of the effect.

The symbol 1 character presentation indicates the information of the character presentation relating to the symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the symbol 2 character presentation indicates the information of the character presentation relating to the symbol 2 (special figure 2). Furthermore, the handle information (firing position designation) is information indicating the recommended firing direction. In addition, the per-symbol ending demonstration indicates the information of the winning end demonstration relating to the symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the per-symbol ending demonstration shows the information of the winning end demonstration relating to the symbol 2 (special figure 2). is shown.

The firing position specification effect is information indicating the type of recommended firing direction effect as described above, and error A is an error of a specific nature among various errors , radio waves, etc.). Furthermore, the number of special symbols 1 stored indicates information on the number of reservations related to symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the number of special symbols 2 stored indicates information on the number of reservations related to symbol 2 (special figures 2). It is.

Next, the following commands were considered as commands to be deleted from these commands (power failure recovery commands not to be sent). First, among the above-described power interruption recovery commands, the commands (communication check 1 and communication check 2) for indicating that communication is being performed normally are not transmitted. In addition, a command for a big hit start demonstration performance (symbol 1 condition device start performance, symbol 2 condition device start performance) and a command (handle information) indicating a recommended shooting direction are not transmitted. Further, commands for end demonstration effects (end demo per 1 symbol, end demo per 2 symbols) and commands indicating specific errors (error A) are not transmitted.

In the situation subject to deletion of command transmission, when the power is restored, the effect display device 60 displays the return screen (here, the return screen of FIG. 29A) used in other situations related to the big win. For example, it is conceivable to use a yellow dedicated jackpot background as the recovery screen when the power failure recovery command is not transmitted as described above. In any situation during the jackpot (for example, each situation such as the jackpot start demonstration, each round, the jackpot end demo, etc.), a jackpot return screen (jackpot Make sure that the medium-only background (yellow background) return screen) is displayed. In addition, during the state of waiting for passage of the combined operation gate, which is during the operation of the conditional device, or during the big hit, the return screen of the special background during the big hit is displayed.

By minimizing the number of power failure recovery commands to be transmitted in this way, it is possible to generate spare capacity in the main CPU 501 when the power failure is restored, and to ensure the maximum processing capacity to be allocated to the setting function and the like. .

In addition, as the return screen for the big hit, by using the return screen displayed (together) with the navigation display for the right-handed effect and the display object explaining the situation such as "preparing the screen", it is possible to The return screen (FIG. 29(a)) during the special figure variation at the time of hitting to the right, which is used during the normal game (when not hitting the jackpot), can be shared as a display object other than the background. Then, it is possible to perform a return display in which the main part (a message part, a navigation display part, and other situation explanation part) is shared between during the big win and during the non-big win.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of types of recovery screens, thereby preventing the amount of data of the recovery screens and the size of the table specifying the types of recovery screens from becoming large. Then, in the main board 102, it becomes possible to allocate the secured data processing capacity to transmission of the power failure recovery command related to the setting function.

As a criterion for selecting a command to be deleted, it is possible to select a command whose situation is unlikely to change before and after restoration from power failure.
<Setting function and return of performance when power is restored>

As described above, when the main board 102 transmits the power failure recovery command (command at the time of power recovery) to the sub-main board 301, the sub-main board 301 returns to the performance (screen recovery). However, since the setting function (setting change function) is installed, as shown in FIGS. After the change processing (FIG. 14), timer interrupt permission (S106) is executed, and thereafter game progress interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is executed at predetermined intervals (here, 4 ms).

That is, while the setting change process (FIG. 14) is being executed, it is not a period during which the game can be played by the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 15). For this reason, if the main board 102 immediately sends a power failure recovery command to the sub-main board 301 when the power is turned on, the sub-main board 301 will not be able to display the screen until the timing when processing for screen recovery is performed. Information on return must be retained. However, if the information related to the screen recovery is held for a long period of time, there is a possibility that the information related to the screen recovery will be rewritten to something different from the original one or disappear for some reason. get higher

Therefore, it is conceivable to send the power failure recovery command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 after the processing related to the setting is completed. Furthermore, it is conceivable to change the transmission timing of the power failure recovery command according to the status of the processing related to the setting.

As described above, the setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion port of the setting key cylinder 809, the key is rotated clockwise, and the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is pressed again without pressing the initialization switch 544. When the power is turned on by operating (in the case of the first power-on pattern), the mode shifts to the setting display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed by the game parlor clerk (S133 in FIG. 14: NO). On the other hand, when the setting key (key) is held in the same state (rotated to the right) and the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power is turned on (second 2 power-on pattern), it shifts to the setting change mode in which the setting can be changed (S133 in FIG. 14: YES).

When the power is turned on without inserting the setting key (S122 in FIG. 13: NO) and without pressing the initialization switch 544 (S102 in FIG. 12: NO) (in the case of the third power-on pattern) Alternatively, when the initialization switch 544 is pressed (S102: YES in FIG. 12) to turn on the power (in the case of the fourth power-on pattern), the process does not proceed to the set value change process (FIG. 14).

Among the various power-on patterns described above, in the case of the second power-on pattern (the power-on pattern for setting change mode) and the fourth power-on pattern, the initialization switch 544 is operated in both cases. No return command is sent. Further, in the case of the third power-on pattern, since the initialization switch 544 is not operated, a power failure restoration command is transmitted. However, since it does not shift to the setting value change processing (FIG. 14), it is not affected by the setting value change processing (FIG. 14).

On the other hand, in the case of the first power-on pattern (when the setting confirmation mode is set), the main board 102 is prevented from transmitting the power failure recovery command just because the power is turned on. . After the power is turned on, the main board 102 transmits a power failure recovery command to the sub-main board 301 on condition that the setting confirmation mode ends.

The setting confirmation is an operation performed by the game parlor clerk, and the timing of ending the setting confirmation mode is not uniformly determined. Therefore, if the power failure recovery command is transmitted before the setting confirmation mode ends, the period during which the sub-main board 301 should hold the power failure recovery command information becomes undefined. Further, the longer the retention period of the power failure recovery command in the sub-main board 301, the higher the possibility that an abnormality will occur in the retained information.

However, as described above, by transmitting the power failure recovery command from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 on the condition that the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the sub main board 301 receives the power failure recovery command and sets the Processing for returning to the screen can be performed without waiting for the end of the confirmation mode. Then, the sub-main board 301 receives the power interruption return command at the timing of returning the effect.

As a result, the sub-main board 301 does not need to wait while holding information for returning to the effect. This reduces the processing load associated with holding, and prevents the held data (holding data) from becoming abnormal during holding.

In such an invention, when not shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the power failure recovery command is transmitted immediately after power is turned on. It can be said that a command is what is sent. In such an invention, it can be said that the time value from the timing of turning on the power until the transmission of the restoration command from the power interruption differs according to the state of the setting key at the time of turning on the power.

Regarding the end of the setting change mode, as described above, the key inserted in the setting key cylinder (reference numeral 809 in FIG. 5A) is rotated counterclockwise to complete the setting change process. , the setting change mode is finished. Alternatively, a situation in which both (or one of) the set value and the dot are turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) has elapsed after the setting change process is completed may be regarded as the situation in which the setting change mode is terminated.

While the sub-main board 301 is waiting for the end of the setting confirmation mode, it is conceivable to display characters such as "preparing screen" or "recovering". In addition to this, it is conceivable to perform an effect display while the effect symbols 190a to 190b are in a state of being changed, and to wait for the end of the setting confirmation mode.

However, when the performance symbols 190a to 190b are in the state of being changed, the state of the main board 102 or the sub-main board 301 is not actually in the state of being changed, but the changing effect is displayed. will be performed, and the display contents and the control state will not match. On the other hand, if a message such as "preparing screen" or "recovering" is displayed while waiting for the setting confirmation mode to end, the display content and the control state are prevented from becoming inconsistent. There is an advantage that the status of the pachinko game machine 10 can be easily confirmed.

Various embodiments of the pachinko game machine 10 have been described above, but the present invention is not limited to these, and can be modified in various ways. For example, when performing various variable performances, the above-mentioned mini symbols and guaranteed symbols (or mini symbols or guaranteed symbols) relating to the special symbols 1 and 2 may be displayed together in one screen. Further, the opening and closing of the second starting winning opening (for example, the 2-1 starting winning opening 63A) is not limited to the slide shutter type, and may be opened and closed blades.

In addition, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine that directly pays out game balls as game media acquired by the player to the player so that the player can touch prize balls as described above. For example, the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine (management game machine) that circulates and uses game balls inside the game machine. Further, as a pachinko game machine of enclosed circulation type, a machine capable of electromagnetically recording the entering and exiting of game media can be exemplified.

10 pachinko game machine, 50 game board, 52 game area, 53 main control display device,
62 1st starting prize opening, 63A 2nd-1 starting prize opening, 63B 2-2 starting prize opening,
68 operating port, 70 first special symbol display section, 71 second special symbol display section,
90 big prize winning mouth device, 90a decorative part, 92 big winning mouth, 93 production attacker,
102 main board, 104 sub-board, 113 first propriety determination means,
117 second propriety determination means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub-main board,
501 CPU of the main board, 521 CPU of the sub-main board.

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Production control means for receiving production control information from the main control means and performing control processing according to the production control information;
An image display means for displaying an image related to the effect determined by the effect control means,
The main control means is
obtaining a predetermined random number based on the fact that the game medium shot into the game area flows down the game area and passes through a predetermined starting area;
The random numbers include at least a winning random number for determining a winning lottery, a special symbol random number for determining a special symbol indicating the result of the winning lottery determination, and a variation for determining a variation pattern related to the special symbol. including pattern random numbers and
A winning lottery determination is performed to determine whether or not the winning is based on the winning random number,
Perform a special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol based on the special symbol random number,
Perform a variation pattern lottery determination for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number,
The hit includes a big win and a small win that is different from the big win,
Based on the results of the winning lottery determination, the special symbol lottery determination, and the variation pattern lottery determination, the special symbol is variably displayed by the main control display means and then stopped and displayed,
When the result of the winning lottery determination is a big win, after the stop display of the special pattern, a predetermined open/close area is opened in a predetermined manner for the big win based on establishment of a predetermined big win game start condition. Execute a jackpot game that causes
When the result of the winning lottery determination is a small winning, a small winning game is executed in which the predetermined opening/closing area is opened in a predetermined manner for the small winning after the stop display of the special symbol,
When the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbols is not satisfied even if the game medium passes through the starting area, the special symbol reserved storage information related to the random number can be stored within a predetermined number,
It is possible to set a period of a small win expectation game, which is a game for promoting the expectation of the small win, following the big win game,
The start area includes a first start area, a second start area to be the target of the small win, and a second start area to be the target of the small win, which is arranged downstream of the second start area in relation to the flow of the game medium. there is a third starting region ,
The second starting region is provided with a variable member that can change the ease of entering the ball into the second starting region,
When the game medium is shot in the first shooting mode for passing the game medium through the first starting area, and when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode for passing the game medium through the second starting area or the third starting area . In some cases, the game medium is fired at
The variable member has an easy-ball-entering state in which the variable member is easily displaced to facilitate the entry of the ball into the second starting area, and
In the game state in which the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, when a predetermined number of balls are entered in the third start area during a predetermined period, a first error notification is performed and a specific period is performed. When there is a specific number of balls inside, a second error notification different from the first error notification is performed,
A pachinko game machine, wherein the specific period or the specific number differs depending on whether or not the state is the easy-to-enter state.

Images